Chevrolet 2007 Colorado Specification

Chevrolet 2007 Colorado Specification
2007 Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7
Front Seats .............................................. 9
Rear Seats ............................................. 17
Safety Belts ............................................ 20
Child Restraints ...................................... 44
Airbag System ........................................ 77
Restraint System Check
......................... 96
Features and Controls ................................ 99
Keys ..................................................... 101
Doors and Locks .................................. 106
Windows ............................................... 112
Theft-Deterrent Systems
....................... 115
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle .............................................. 118
Mirrors .................................................. 141
M
OnStar® System ................................... 149
Storage Areas
...................................... 153
Sunroof
................................................ 156
Instrument Panel .......................................
Instrument Panel Overview ...................
Climate Controls ...................................
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
..........................................
Driver Information Center (DIC)
............
Audio System(s) ...................................
157
160
177
181
198
206
Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 245
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
..................................... 246
Towing
................................................. 299
1
Service and Appearance Care ..................
Service .................................................
Fuel ......................................................
Checking Things Under the Hood .........
Rear Axle .............................................
Four-Wheel Drive ..................................
Front Axle
............................................
Bulb Replacement
................................
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement .....................................
Tires .....................................................
Appearance Care ..................................
2
321
324
326
331
368
368
369
370
375
377
422
Vehicle Identification ............................. 432
Electrical System .................................. 432
Capacities and Specifications ................ 437
Maintenance Schedule .............................. 439
Maintenance Schedule .......................... 440
Customer Assistance Information .............
Customer Assistance and Information .....
Reporting Safety Defects ......................
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .....
459
460
475
478
Index .......................................................... 481
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if
it is needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle
is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
Canadian Owners
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and
the name COLORADO are registered trademarks
of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the
time it was printed. We reserve the right to make
changes after that time without further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet
Motor Division whenever it appears in this manual.
This manual describes features that may be
available in this model, but your vehicle may not
have all of them. For example, more than one
entertainment system may be offered or your
vehicle may have been ordered without a
front passenger or rear seats.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15866155 B Second Printing
©
A French language copy of this manual can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from
beginning to end when they first receive their
new vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn
about the features and controls for the vehicle.
Pictures and words work together in the owner
manual to explain things.
2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
3
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual
and the page number where it can be found.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this
book. We use a box and the word CAUTION to
tell about things that could hurt you if you were
to ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could
hurt you or other people.
4
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard
is. Then we tell you what to do to help avoid
or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.
If you do not, you or others could be hurt.
You will also find a
circle with a slash
through it in this book.
This safety symbol
means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or
“Do Not let this happen.”
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown
along with the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific component,
control, message, gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something
that could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage
the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could
be costly. But the notice will tell what to do to help
avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle.
They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of
a component, gage, or indicator, reference
the following topics:
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in
Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
6
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ..................................................... 9
Manual Seats ................................................ 9
Power Seats ............................................... 10
Manual Lumbar ........................................... 10
Power Lumbar ............................................. 11
Heated Seats .............................................. 11
Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 12
Head Restraints .......................................... 15
Seatback Latches ........................................ 16
Rear Seats .................................................... 17
Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab) .......... 17
Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab) ................ 18
Safety Belts .................................................. 20
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 20
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ............................................. 25
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 26
Driver Position ............................................. 26
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 34
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 35
Right Front Passenger Position ................... 35
Center Front Passenger Position ................. 36
Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 37
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 40
Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 43
Safety Belt Extender ................................... 43
Child Restraints ............................................ 44
Older Children ............................................. 44
Infants and Young Children ......................... 46
Child Restraint Systems .............................. 50
Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 54
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) .................................... 56
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ................................... 69
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position ....................... 71
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ......................... 72
7
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Airbag System .............................................. 77
Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 80
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 83
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 85
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 85
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 86
Passenger Sensing System ......................... 88
8
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 94
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 95
Restraint System Check ............................... 96
Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 96
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ........................................... 96
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if
you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat
while the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to
unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it
and release the bar. Try to move the seat with your
body to make sure the seat is locked into place.
9
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the
Power Seats
If the vehicle has power
seats, the controls used
to operate them are
located on the outboard
side of the seats.
entire horizontal control up or down.
• Use the vertical control to recline the seatback.
See “Power Reclining Seatbacks” under
Reclining Seatbacks on page 12 for more
information.
Manual Lumbar
If your vehicle has
this feature, there is
a knob located on
the outboard side
of the driver’s seat.
To adjust the seat, do any of the following:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding
the horizontal control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat
cushion by moving the front of the horizontal
control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat
cushion by moving the rear of the horizontal
control up or down.
10
Turn the top of the knob toward the front of the
vehicle to increase lumbar support. Turn the
top of the knob toward the rear of the vehicle to
decrease lumbar support.
Power Lumbar
Heated Seats
If your vehicle has this
feature, the control is
located on the outboard
side of the seat(s).
Press and hold the front of the control until you
have the desired lumbar support. To decrease
lumbar support, press and hold the rear of
the control.
If your vehicle has
this feature, the
controls are located
on the outboard side
of the front seats.
This feature will heat the cushion and back of
the seats.
Press the top of the switch to turn the heat to
the high setting. Press the bottom of the switch
to turn the heat to the low setting. Put the switch
in the center position to turn the heat off.
The ignition must be on for the heated seat
feature to work. The seat will heat to the last
setting if the ignition has been turned off and
then turned back on.
The passenger’s safety belt must be fastened for the
heated seat feature to work on the passenger’s seat.
11
Reclining Seatbacks
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if
you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat
while the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
12
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on
the seatback to be sure it is locked.
If your seats have manual reclining seatbacks,
the lever used to operate them is located on the
outboard side of the seat(s).
To return the seatback to an upright position,
do the following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to
the seatback and the seatback will return to
the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position,
then release the lever to lock the seatback
in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make
sure it is locked.
If the seats have power
reclining seatbacks,
use the vertical power
seat control located
on the outboard side
of the seat.
• To recline the seatback, press the control
toward the rear of the vehicle.
• To raise the seatback, press the control
toward the front of the vehicle.
13
CAUTION:
(Continued)
The shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be against your body.
Instead, it will be in front of you. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving
neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either.
In a crash, the belt could go up over
your abdomen. The belt forces would be
there, not at your pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even if you buckle up, your safety belts
cannot do their job when you are
reclined like this.
CAUTION:
14
(Continued)
For proper protection when the vehicle
is in motion, have the seatback upright.
Then sit well back in the seat and wear
your safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
Head Restraints
Your front seats may have adjustable head
restraints. If your vehicle has rear seats, they
may have adjustable head restraints.
Pull up on the head
restraint to raise it.
To lower the head
restraint, press
the button located on
top of the seatback
and push down on
the head restraint.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the
restraint is at the same height as the top of
the occupant’s head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
15
Seatback Latches
Your vehicle may have front seatbacks that fold
forward for easy access to the rear seats or
the storage area behind the seats.
To fold the seatback
forward, push the lever
on the side of the
seat rearward and pull
the seatback forward.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on
the seatback to be sure it is locked.
To return the seatback to the upright position,
push the seatback all the way back until it latches.
If the seatback was reclined before being folded
forward, it will return to the reclined position.
16
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab)
If your vehicle has
an extended cab,
there may be forward
folding seats in the
rear area.
To store the seat, do the following:
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
To fold the rear seat cushion(s) from the stored
position to the sitting position, pull the front of
the seat cushion down completely.
The rear seat storage compartments must be
closed before folding the seat down. See
Rear Storage Area on page 154.
1. Secure the safety belt buckle to the inboard side
of the seat with the hook and loop fastener (A),
so that it does not move when not in use.
2. Push the entire seat up until it is flush with the
trim panel.
17
Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab)
To fold the rear seatback(s) forward, do the
following:
The rear seatback(s) in the crew cab can be
folded forward.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
1. Disconnect the rear center safety belt latch
from the mini buckle by inserting the tip of
the safety belt tongue into the slot on
the buckle. Let the belt retract.
18
2. Pull the loop,
located on the
outboard side of
the seatback,
forward until you
hear a click.
3. Fold the seatback(s) forward.
To return the seatback(s) to the upright position,
do the following:
1. Lift the seatback(s) and push it into place.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on
the seatback to be sure it is locked.
2. Make sure the seatback(s) is locked by
pushing and pulling on it.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed,
not properly attached, or twisted will not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that
the safety belts are properly routed and
attached, and are not twisted.
3. Reconnect the center safety belt latch plate to
the mini buckle. Make sure the safety belt is
not twisted. Push and pull on the latch plate to
be sure it is secure.
When the seatback is not in use, it should be kept
in the upright, locked position.
19
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use
safety belts properly. It also tells you some things
you should not do with safety belts.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
This includes riding on the tailgate, even
when the vehicle is operated at low
speeds. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. People riding on the
tailgate can easily lose their balance and
fall in response to vehicle maneuvers.
Falling from a moving vehicle may result
in serious injuries or death.
Do not allow people to ride in, or on, any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly.
20
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and
your passengers to buckle your safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 184
and Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
on page 184.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces,
the law says to wear safety belts. Here is
why: They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you
do have a crash, you do not know if it will be
a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can
be so serious that even buckled up, a person
would not survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people who buckle up
can survive and sometimes walk away. Without
belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes
buckling up does matter... a lot!
21
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a
seat on wheels.
22
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by
something. In a real vehicle, it could be the
windshield...
23
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle
does. You get more time to stop. You stop
over more distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety belts
make such good sense.
24
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are
accident if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a
safety belt, even if you are upside down. And
your chance of being conscious during and
after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get
out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I
have to wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so
far from home, why should I wear
safety belts?
in an accident — even one that is not your
fault — you and your passengers can be hurt.
Being a good driver does not protect you
from things beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds
of less than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
they work with safety belts — not instead of
them. Every airbag system ever offered
for sale has required the use of safety belts.
Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,
you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal
collisions, but especially in side and other
collisions.
25
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
This part is only for people of adult size.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
Be aware that there are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And there
are different rules for smaller children and babies.
If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see
Older Children on page 44 or Infants and Young
Children on page 46. Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt.
Here is how to wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
First, you will want to know which restraint
systems your vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt
across you. Do not let it get twisted.
26
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the
belt across you very quickly. If this happens,
let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until
it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it
is secure. If the belt is not long enough,
see Safety Belt Extender on page 43.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to
the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a
crash. See Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
on page 34.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
27
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop
or crash.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide
under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen.
28
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give
nearly as much protection this way.
29
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt
is too loose. In a crash, you could slide
under the lap belt and apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
30
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a
crash, the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
31
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear
the shoulder belt under your arm. In a
crash, your body would move too far
forward, which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the belt
would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.
It should be worn over the shoulder at
all times.
32
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted
belt. In a crash, you would not have the
full width of the belt to spread impact
forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight
so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
33
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
height adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling
off your shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height
adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the
safety belt in a crash.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way. When
the safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plate up
the safety belt webbing. The latch plate should
rest on the stitching on the safety belt, near
the guide loop on the side wall.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is
out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you
can damage both the belt and your vehicle.
34
To move it up or down,
squeeze the release
buttons (A) together,
or pull them toward
you, and move
the height adjuster to
the desired position.
After you move the height adjuster to where you
want it, try to move it down without squeezing the
release buttons to make sure it has locked into
position.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely
to be seriously injured if they do not wear
safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it
is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt
in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,
the key to making safety belts effective is wearing
them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
safety belt properly, see Driver Position on
page 26.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except
for one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion
of the belt out all the way, you will engage the
child restraint locking feature which may turn off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. If this happens, just
let the belt go back all the way and start again.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder
belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low
as possible, below the rounding, throughout
the pregnancy.
35
Center Front Passenger Position
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has a 60/40 split front seat,
someone can sit in the center position.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as
shown until the belt is snug.
When you sit in the center front seating position,
you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and
pull it along the belt.
36
Buckle, position and release it the same way
as the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 43.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
Rear Seat Passengers
Lap-Shoulder Belt
It is very important for rear seat passengers to
buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted
people in the rear seat are hurt more often in
crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash.
And they can strike others in the vehicle who
are wearing safety belts.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt
across you. Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the
belt across you very quickly. If this happens,
let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
37
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make
sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the
way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all
the way and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 43.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide
under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
38
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop
or a crash.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the
buckle. For outboard seating positions, when
the safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plate
up the safety belt webbing. The latch plate should
rest on the stitching on the safety belt, near the
guide loop on the side wall.
39
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Your vehicle may have rear shoulder belt
comfort guides for the rear outside positions.
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide
added safety belt comfort for older children
who have outgrown booster seats and for some
adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the
comfort guide positions the belt away from
the neck and head.
Here is how to install a comfort guide to the
shoulder belt:
1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip located
between the interior body and the seatback.
40
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt.
The elastic cord must be under the belt.
Then, place the guide over the belt and
insert the two edges of the belt into the
slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies
flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt
and the guide on top.
41
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn
may not provide the protection needed
in a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt
as described in Rear Seat Passengers on
page 37. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store a comfort guide, squeeze
the belt edges together so that you can take them
out of the guide. Slide the guide back on its
storage clip located between the interior body
and the seatback.
42
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the
driver and right front passenger. Although you
cannot see them, they are part of the safety belt
assembly. They help tighten the safety belts during
the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal
or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions
for pretensioner activation are met.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate
in a crash, you will need to get new ones,
and probably other new parts for your safety
belt system. See Replacing Restraint System
Parts After a Crash on page 96.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When
you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be long enough
for you. To help avoid personal injury, do not let
someone else use it, and use it only for the seat
it is made to fit. The extender has been designed
for adults. Never use it for securing child seats.
To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt.
For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
43
Child Restraints
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety
belts?
Older Children
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt should not
cross the face or neck. The lap belt should
fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top
of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe
or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats
should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
44
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need
to use safety belts properly.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The belt cannot properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children
can be crushed together and seriously
injured. A belt must be used by only
one person at a time.
belt, but the child is so small that the
shoulder belt is very close to the child’s
face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a
window, move the child toward the center
of the vehicle. Also see Rear Safety Belt
Comfort Guides on page 40. If the child is
sitting in the center rear seat passenger
position, move the child toward the safety
belt buckle. In either case, be sure that
the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,
so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide.
45
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt
in this way, in a crash the child might slide
under the belt. The belt’s force would then
be applied right on the child’s abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force
to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This
includes infants and all other children. Neither
the distance traveled nor the age and size of
the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to
use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in every Canadian
province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
46
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have the protection provided
by appropriate restraints. Young children should
not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,
unless there is no other choice. Instead, they
need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby does
not weigh much — until a crash. During a
crash a baby will become so heavy it is
not possible to hold it. For example,
in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a
12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become
a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
47
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it inflates can
be seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s
weight, height, and age but also whether or not
the restraint will be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
48
For most basic types of child restraints, there
are many different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is
designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,
the restraint will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular child restraint.
In addition, there are many kinds of restraints
available for children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn
infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs
so much compared with the rest of its
body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing
seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
the strongest part of an infant’s body, the
back and shoulders. Infants always should
be secured in appropriate infant restraints.
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is
quite unlike that of an adult or older child,
for whom the safety belts are designed.
A young child’s hip bones are still so small
that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may
not remain low on the hip bones, as it
should. Instead, it may settle up around
the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children always should be secured
in appropriate child restraints.
49
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s
head rests toward the center of the vehicle.
50
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint
with the seating surface against the back of the
infant. The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant
positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the harness and also
sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped
or shelf-like shields.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt
system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt
positioner, and some high-back booster seats
have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also
help a child to see out the window.
51
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed
for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,
or position children. A built-in child restraint
system is a permanent part of the motor
vehicle. An add-on child restraint system
is a portable one, which is purchased by
the vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries,
an add-on child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. With built-in or add-on
child restraints, the child has to be secured
within the child restraint.
When choosing an add-on child restraint,
be sure the child restraint is designed to
be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards. Then follow the instructions
for the restraint. You may find these
instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.
52
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint
in the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in
a crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that
came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child
restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child
restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 56
for more information. A child can be endangered
in a crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer
to the instructions that come with the restraint
which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,
or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement copy from the
manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint
can move around in a collision or sudden stop
and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in your
vehicle — even when no child is in it.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
There are several systems for securing the
child within the child restraint. One system,
the three-point harness, has straps that come
down over each of the infant’s shoulders
and buckle together at the crotch. The
five-point harness system has two shoulder
straps, two hip straps, and a crotch strap.
A shield may take the place of hip straps.
A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that are
attached to a flat pad which rests low against
the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield
has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like
shield that swings up or to the side.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child is not properly
secured in the child restraint. Make sure
the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that
restraint.
Because there are different systems, it is
important to refer to the instructions that come
with the restraint. A child can be endangered
in a crash if the child is not properly secured
in the child restraint.
53
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they are restrained in the rear rather than
the front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a
rear seat, including: an infant or a child riding
in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat; an older child riding
in a booster seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put
a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child
is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint
can be seriously injured or killed if the
right front passenger’s airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag if the
system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and
no one can guarantee that an airbag
will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
CAUTION:
54
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat
as far back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that
will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
we recommend that rear-facing child restraints
not be transported in your vehicle, even if
the airbag is off.
{CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center
front seat can be badly injured or killed
by the right front passenger’s airbag if it
inflates. Never secure a child restraint in
the center front seat. It is always better to
secure a child restraint in the rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position. The restraints will not work properly.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint
can move around in a collision or sudden stop
and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in your
vehicle — even when no child is in it.
55
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed
to make installation of a child restraint easier.
The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle
and attachments on the child restraint that
are made for use with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
56
When installing a child restraint with a top tether,
you must also use either the lower anchors or
the safety belts to properly secure the child
restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use
the child restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a child restraint
with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints
have lower anchors and attachments or top
tether anchors and attachments.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the
vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child
restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)
on the child restraint connects to the top tether
anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward
movement and rotation of the child restraint
during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)
or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top tether to
the anchor.
57
Some child restraints that have a top tether are
designed for use with or without the top tether
being attached. Others require the top tether
always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires
that forward-facing child restraints have a top
tether, and that the tether be attached. In
the United States, some child restraints also
have a top tether. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many
child restraints. Ask the child restraint
manufacturer whether or not a kit is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether
Anchor Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Crew Cab — Rear Seat
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Extended Cab — Rear
Seat
58
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
For extended cab models with rear seats,
there are exposed metal lower anchors for
each rear seating position, attached to the
back wall, near the seat cushion.
To assist you in locating the lower anchors, place
your hand in a palm-up position and reach up
between the seat cushion and the seatback.
Front Seat — Regular
and Extended Cab
without Rear Seats
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors,
the top tether anchor
symbol is located on
the trim cover.
For crew cab models, there are exposed metal
lower anchors for each rear outboard seating
position, located where the seatback meets
the back of the seat cushion.
59
Crew Cab
The top tether anchors in a crew cab model are
located on the back wall behind each rear seating
position. Be sure to use an anchor located on
the same side of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will be placed.
60
Extended Cab — Rear Seat
The top tether anchors in an extended cab model
are located on the center of the back wall
behind a removable cover for the rear seating
positions. Be sure to use an anchor located
nearest to the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position of a vehicle that has
rear seats if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the
top tether must be attached. There is no place
to attach the top tether in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they are restrained in the rear rather than
the front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint
on page 54 for additional information.
Regular and Extended Cab without Rear Seats
For regular and extended cab models without
rear seats, there is a top tether anchor located
behind a removable cover on the back wall behind
the right front passenger seat. You may have to
pull the seatback forward to access the anchor.
61
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not
attached to anchors, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured
or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type
child restraint is properly installed using
the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
62
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor
in the vehicle is designed to hold only
one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single anchor
could cause the anchor or attachment to
come loose or even break during a crash.
A child or others could be injured if this
happens. To help prevent injury to people
and damage to your vehicle, attach only
one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Secure any unused
safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the
shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle
has one, after the child restraint has been
installed. Be sure to follow the instructions
of the child restraint manufacturer.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint or
the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s
safety belt assembly may cause damage to
these parts. Make sure when securing unused
safety belts behind the child restraint that
there is no contact between the child restraint
or the LATCH attachment parts and the
vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety
belts secured may cause damage to the safety
belt or the seat. When removing the child
restraint, always remember to return the safety
belts to their normal, stowed position before
folding the rear seat.
63
Crew Cab — Rear Seat
2.2. Route the top tether according to
your child restraint instructions and
the following instructions:
If the position you
are using has a fixed
head restraint and
you are using a
single tether, route
the tether over the
head restraint.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions
recommends that the top tether be attached,
attach the top tether to the top tether
anchor (A). Refer to the child restraint
instructions and the following steps:
2.1. Pull the seatback forward to access
the top tether anchors (A). See Rear
Seat Operation (Extended Cab)
on page 17 or Rear Seat Operation
(Crew Cab) on page 18.
64
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and
you are using a single
tether, raise the
head restraint and route
the tether under the
head restraint and
in between the head
restraint posts.
If the position you
are using has a fixed
or adjustable head
restraint and you are
using a dual tether,
route the tether around
the head restraint.
2.3. Attach the top tether to the anchor (A).
Make sure that you secure the top
tether to the top tether anchor and
not to the seatback latch (B).
2.4. Push rearward on the seatback until it
locks into its upright position. Push and
pull on the seatback to make sure it
is secured properly.
3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to
the lower anchors. If the child restraint does
not have lower attachments or the desired
seating position does not have lower anchors,
secure the child restraint with the top tether
and the safety belts. Refer to your child
restraint manufacturer instructions and the
instructions in this manual.
3.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
3.2. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child restraint to
the lower anchors.
4. Tighten the top tether.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
65
Extended Cab — Rear Seat
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to
the lower anchors. If the child restraint does
not have lower attachments or the desired
seating position does not have lower anchors,
secure the child restraint with the top tether
and the safety belts. Refer to your child
restraint manufacturer instructions and the
instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors (D) for the
desired seating position.
66
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach the lower attachments on the
child restraint to the lower anchors (D)
in the vehicle. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends
that the top tether be attached, attach
and tighten the top tether to the top tether
anchor (C). Refer to the child restraint
instructions and the following steps:
2.1. Pull on the finger access tab to remove
the cover to access the top tether
anchors (C).
2.2. Route the top tether (A) through the
loop (B) at the top of the seatback to
attach the top tether to the nearest
top tether anchor (C).
3. Tighten the lower anchor attachments and
the top tether. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Front Seat — Regular/Extended Cab
without Rear Seats
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
airbag and a passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system is designed
to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infant
seat or a small child in a forward-facing
child restraint or booster seat is detected.
See Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position on page 72 and Passenger
Sensing System on page 88 for important
safety information and additional information
on installing a child restraint in the right front
seat position.
1. See Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position on page 72 for instructions
on installing the child restraint using the
safety belts.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions
recommends that the top tether be attached,
attach and tighten the top tether to the top
tether anchor. Refer to the child restraint
instructions and the following steps:
2.1. Pull the seatback forward to access
the top tether anchor. See Seatback
Latches on page 16.
2.2. Pull on the finger access tab to remove
the cover to access the top tether
anchor.
67
2.3. Route the top tether according to your
child restraint instructions and the
following instructions:
If the position you
are using has a
fixed head restraint
and you are using
a single tether, route
the tether over the
head restraint.
If the position you
are using has an
adjustable head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, raise the
head restraint and
route the tether under
the head restraint and
in between the head
restraint posts.
68
If the position you
are using has a
fixed or adjustable
head restraint and
you are using a dual
tether, route the
tether around the
head restraint.
3. Attach and tighten the top tether according
to your child restraint instructions.
4. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
If your child restraint has the LATCH system,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 56.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in this position.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came
with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
69
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
5. If your child restraint has a top tether, attach
the top tether to the top tether anchor.
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) on page 56.
70
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
7. Tighten the top tether to the anchor.
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) on page 56.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached, disconnect it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The
safety belt will move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or larger child passenger.
For outboard seating positions, when the safety
belt is not in use, slide the latch plate up the safety
belt webbing. The latch plate should rest on the
stitching on the safety belt, near the upper anchor
on the side wall.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
{CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center
front seat can be badly injured or killed
by the right front passenger’s airbag if it
inflates. Never secure a child restraint in
the center front seat. It is always better to
secure a child restraint in the rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in this position.
71
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
airbag. A rear seat is a safer place to secure
a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 54.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing
infant seat or a small child in a forward-facing
child restraint or booster seat is detected.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 88 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 186
for more information on this including important
safety information.
There is a label on your sun visor that says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.”
This is because the risk to the rear-facing child
is so great, if the airbag deploys.
72
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system
is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it
will go. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, never
put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front passenger seat unless the passenger airbag
status indicator shows off and the airbag is off.
Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint
can be seriously injured or killed if the
right front passenger’s airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the rear-facing
child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off
before using a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat
that will accommodate a rear-facing
child restraint, whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat
as far back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 56.
73
If your vehicle has rear seats, there is no top
tether anchor at the right front seating position.
Do not secure a child seat in this position if
a national or local law requires that the top tether
be anchored or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH) on page 56 if the child
restraint has a top tether.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
74
Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
frontal airbag. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 88. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a
rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If your
child restraint is forward-facing, move the
seat as far back as it will go before securing
the child restraint in this seat. See Manual
Seats on page 9 or Power Seats on page 10.
When the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator should light and stay lit
when you turn the ignition to ON or START.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 186.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
6. If your vehicle does not have rear seats and
if your child restraint has a top tether, attach
the top tether to the top tether anchor.
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) on page 56.
75
8. Tighten the top tether to the anchor.
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) on page 56.
9. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
10. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on the
instrument panel will be lit and stay lit
when the key is turned to ON or START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the
on indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall
the child restraint.
7. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt. You should not be
able to pull more of the belt from the
retractor once the lock has been set.
76
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in
the child restraint in a rear seat position in
the vehicle if one is available and check with
your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached, disconnect it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The
safety belt will move freely again and be ready
to work for an adult or larger child passenger.
When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latch
plate up the safety belt webbing. The latch
plate should rest on the stitching on the safety
belt, near the upper anchor on the side wall.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver
and a frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
Your vehicle may also have roof-mounted side
impact airbags. Roof-mounted side impact airbags
are available for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver and for the
right front passenger and the passenger seated
directly behind that passenger.
If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the airbag
covering on the ceiling near the side windows.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s
airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.
77
Here are the most important things to know about
the airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a
crash if you are not wearing your safety
belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing
your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. All airbags are designed
to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed to deploy
in moderate to severe frontal and near
frontal crashes. They are not designed
to inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or
in many side crashes. And, for some
unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags
may provide less protection in frontal
crashes than more forceful airbags
have provided in the past.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side
of your vehicle. They are not designed
to inflate in frontal, in rollover, or in
rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a
safety belt properly — whether or not
there is an airbag for that person.
78
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags
inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you are too close to an
inflating airbag, as you would be if you
were leaning forward, it could seriously
injure you. Safety belts help keep you in
position for airbag inflation before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep
against the door.
Anyone who is up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags
plus lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and
infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your vehicle.
To read how, see Older Children on
page 44 or Infants and Young Children
on page 46.
79
There is an airbag
readiness light on
the instrument panel
cluster, which shows
the airbag symbol.
Where Are the Airbags?
The system checks the airbag electrical system
for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is
an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 185 for more information.
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
80
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver and the person seated
directly behind the driver, it is located in the
ceiling above the side windows.
81
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact
airbag for the right front passenger and the person
seated directly behind that passenger, it is
located in the ceiling above the side windows.
82
If something is between an occupant
and an airbag, the bag might not inflate
properly or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury or even
death. The path of an inflating airbag
must be kept clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering. If your vehicle
has side impact airbags, never secure
anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tie down through any
door or window opening. If you do, the
path of an inflating side impact airbag
will be blocked. The path of an inflating
airbag must be kept clear.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they are
designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds take into account a variety of desired
deployment and non-deployment events and are
used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in
time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the
occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will or
should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle
is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact, and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal
airbags, which adjust the restraint according
to crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic
frontal sensors which help the sensing system
distinguish between a moderate and a more
severe frontal impact. For moderate frontal
impacts, these airbags inflate at a level less
than full deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of
your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t
move or deform, the threshold level for the
reduced deployment is about 8 to 16 mph
(12.9 to 25.7 km/h), and the threshold level
for a full deployment is about 19 to 24 mph
(30.6 to 38.6 km/h) if the other sensors do not
over-ride this. The threshold level can vary,
however, with specific vehicle design, so that it
can be somewhat above or below this range.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash
speeds. For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms,
the airbags could inflate at a different
crash speed than if the vehicle hits an
object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object
(like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle goes straight into
the object.
83
Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
If your vehicle has side impact airbags, it has
electronic side sensors. The side impact airbags
are intended to inflate in moderate to severe
side crashes. A side impact airbag will inflate if
the crash severity is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact airbags
are not intended to inflate in frontal or near-frontal
impacts, rollovers or rear impacts. Both side
impact airbags will deploy when either side of
the vehicle is struck.
Your vehicle has seat position sensors which
enable the sensing system to monitor the position
of the driver’s seat and the right front passenger’s
seat. Seat position sensors provide information
that is used to determine if the airbags should
deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment.
84
In any particular crash, no one can say whether
an airbag should have inflated simply because
of the damage to a vehicle or because of what
the repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation
is determined by what the vehicle hits, the
angle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle
slows down in frontal or near-frontal impacts.
For side impact airbags, inflation is determined
by the location and severity of the impact.
The airbag system is designed to work properly
under a wide range of conditions, including off-road
usage. Observe safe driving speeds, especially
on rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.
See Off-Road Driving on page 260 for more tips
on off-road driving.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag
sensing system detects that the vehicle is
in a crash. The sensing system triggers a
release of gas from the inflator, which inflates
the airbag. The inflator, airbag, and related
hardware are all part of the airbag modules
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument
panel in front of the right front passenger.
For vehicles with roof-mounted side impact
airbags, there are also airbag modules in the
ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal
collisions, even belted occupants can contact
the steering wheel or the instrument panel.
In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided
by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
But the frontal airbags would not help you in
many types of collisions, including rollovers,
rear impacts, and many side impacts, primarily
because an occupant’s motion is not toward
the airbag. Side impact airbags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including
many frontal or near frontal collisions, rollovers,
and rear impacts.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal collisions for the driver’s and
right front passenger’s frontal airbags, and
only in moderate to severe side collisions for
vehicles with side impact airbags.
85
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,
so quickly that some people may not even realize
the airbag inflated. Roof-mounted side impact
airbags may still be at least partially inflated
minutes after the vehicle comes to rest. Some
components of the airbag module — the steering
wheel hub for the driver’s airbag, the instrument
panel for the right front passenger’s airbag
or the ceiling of your vehicle near the side
windows — may be hot for a short time. The parts
of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There
may be some smoke and dust coming from the
vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation
does not prevent the driver from seeing out
of the front windshield or being able to steer
the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
86
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be
dust in the air. This dust could cause
breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh
air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following
an airbag deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors (if your vehicle has power door
locks), turn the interior lamps on, flash the hazard
warning flashers, and turn off the radio when the
airbag inflates. You can lock the doors again by
using the door lock. The interior lamps and hazard
warning flashers will deactivate after approximately
15 minutes. You can use the radio controls to
adjust the radio.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information
after a crash. See Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy on page 478 and Event Data
Recorders on page 479.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your
airbag system. Improper service can mean
that your airbag system will not work properly.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur
from the right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.
After an airbag inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system. If you do not get
them, the airbag system will not be there to help
protect you in another crash. A new system will
include airbag modules and possibly other
parts. The service manual for your vehicle
covers the need to replace other parts.
87
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system.
The passenger airbag status indicator on the
instrument panel will be visible when you turn
your ignition key to ON or START. The words
ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check.
United States
Canada
When the system check is complete, either the
word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or
the symbol for off will be visible. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 186.
88
The passenger sensing system will turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of
the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with
sensors that are part of the right front passenger’s
seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed
to detect the presence of a properly seated
occupant and determine if the passenger’s frontal
airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they are restrained in the rear rather than
the front seat. We recommend that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant
riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding
in a forward-facing child seat and an older
child riding in a booster seat.
There is a label on your sun visor that says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.”
This is because the risk to the rear-facing child
is so great if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint
can be seriously injured or killed if the
right front passenger’s airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint,
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat
as far back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
(Continued)
89
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, never
put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front passenger seat unless the passenger airbag
status indicator shows off and the airbag is off.
Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off
before using a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position.
CAUTION:
90
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be
transported in vehicles with a rear seat
that will accommodate a rear-facing child
restraint, whenever possible.
If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat
as far back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a forward-facing child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight
off of the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by
a smaller person, such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger’s frontal airbag has been
turned off by the passenger sensing system, the
off indicator on the instrument panel will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the
on indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall
the child restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing
a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position
on page 72.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in
the child restraint in a rear seat position in
the vehicle if one is available and check with
your dealer.
91
The passenger sensing system is designed to
enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag anytime the system senses
that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the
right front passenger’s seat. When the passenger
sensing system has allowed the airbag to be
enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child
restraints and for very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, depending
upon the person’s seating posture and body
build. Everyone in your vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right
front passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit,
it could be because that person is not sitting
properly in the seat. If this happens, turn
the vehicle off and ask the person to place the
seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,
with the person’s legs comfortably extended.
92
Restart the vehicle and have the person remain
in this position for about two minutes. This will
allow the system to detect that person and then
enable the passenger’s airbag.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever comes on
and stays on, it means that something
may be wrong with the airbag system.
If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger’s
seat may not have the protection of the
airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 185 for more on this, including
important safety information.
See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 95 for more information about
modifications that can affect how the system
operates.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat
cushion and seatback may interfere with
the proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can
affect how well the passenger sensing system
operates. You may want to consider not using seat
covers or other aftermarket equipment if your
vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
93
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be
serviced. There are parts of the airbag system
in several places around your vehicle. You do
not want the system to inflate while someone is
working on your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer
and the service manual have information about
servicing your vehicle and the airbag system.
To purchase a service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 476.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are
close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably
part of the airbag system. Be sure to
follow proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing work
for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
94
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front
A: Changing or moving any parts of the
or sides of the vehicle that could keep
the airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your
vehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,
front end or side sheet metal, they may keep
the airbag system from working properly.
Also, the airbag system may not work properly
if you relocate any of the airbag sensors.
If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance
before you modify your vehicle. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure
on page 460.
my vehicle modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my airbag system?
front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel,
instrument panel, ceiling headliner, ceiling
and pillar garnish trim, roof-mounted airbag
modules, or airbag wiring can affect the
operation of the airbag system. If you
have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure
on page 460.
95
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,
retractors and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety
belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have
it repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 425
for more information.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag
covers, and have them repaired or replaced. The
airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
Notice: If you damage the covering for
the driver’s or the right front passenger’s
airbag, or the side impact airbag covering
(if equipped) on the ceiling near the side
windows, the airbag may not work properly.
96
You may have to replace the airbag module
in the steering wheel, both the airbag module
and the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s airbag, or side impact airbag
module and ceiling covering for roof-mounted
side impact airbags (if equipped.) Do not
open or break the airbag coverings.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint
system may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in serious injury
or even death in a crash. To help make
sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected
and any necessary replacements made
as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts
or LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be
necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they
would be if worn during a more severe crash,
then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a
more severe crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.
Collision damage also may mean you will need to
have LATCH system, safety belt or seat parts
repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may
be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system
was not being used at the time of the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace
airbag system parts. See the part on the airbag
system earlier in this section.
If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need to
replace the driver’s and right front passenger’s
safety belt assemblies. Be sure to do so. Then the
new assemblies will be there to help protect you
in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver
and front passenger’s safety belt assemblies,
even if the frontal airbags have not deployed.
The driver and front passenger’s safety belt
assemblies contain the safety belt pretensioners.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if
your vehicle has been in a collision, or if your
airbag readiness light stays on after you start
your vehicle or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 185.
97
✍ NOTES
98
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ............................................................ 101
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ........ 102
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation .................................. 103
Doors and Locks ........................................ 106
Door Locks ................................................ 106
Power Door Locks ..................................... 107
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks ............................................ 108
Rear Door Security Locks (Crew Cab) ....... 108
Lockout Protection ..................................... 109
Rear Doors (Extended Cab) ...................... 109
Tailgate ..................................................... 110
Windows ...................................................... 112
Manual Windows ....................................... 112
Power Windows ........................................ 113
Sliding Rear Window ................................. 114
Sun Visors ................................................ 115
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 115
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 115
Passlock® .................................................. 117
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 118
New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 118
Ignition Positions ....................................... 119
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 121
Starting the Engine .................................... 121
Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 123
Automatic Transmission Operation ............. 124
Manual Transmission Operation ................. 126
Four-Wheel Drive ...................................... 129
Parking Brake ........................................... 133
Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transmission) ....................... 135
Shifting Out of Park (P)
(Automatic Transmission) ....................... 137
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transmission) ........................... 137
Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 138
Engine Exhaust ......................................... 139
Running the Engine While Parked ............. 140
99
Section 2
Features and Controls
Mirrors ......................................................... 141
Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 141
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ....... 142
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror with OnStar®, Compass
and Temperature Display ....................... 142
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror with Compass and
Temperature Display .............................. 145
Outside Manual Mirrors ............................. 147
Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 148
Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 148
100
OnStar® System .......................................... 149
Storage Areas ............................................. 153
Glove Box ................................................. 153
Cupholder(s) .............................................. 153
Front Armrest Storage Area ....................... 154
Assist Handles .......................................... 154
Rear Storage Area .................................... 154
Sunroof ....................................................... 156
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could be
badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in
the ignition and they could be seriously
injured or killed if caught in the path of
a closing window. Do not leave the keys
in a vehicle with children.
101
There is a double-sided
key that can be used for
the ignition, all door
locks, and the tailgate.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle call
the GM Roadside Assistance Center. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 466.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
If the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer/retailer
provides the owner with a pair of identical keys
and a key code number.
The key code number tells your dealer/retailer
or a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys.
Keep this number in a safe place. If you lose your
keys, you will be able to have new ones made
easily using this number. Your dealer/retailer
should also have this number.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle
to get in. Be sure you have spare keys.
102
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This
is normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter
does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far
from your vehicle. You may need to stand
closer during rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps
to the left or right, hold the transmitter
higher, and try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement
is necessary. See “Battery Replacement”
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 103.
• If you are still having trouble, see your
dealer/retailer or a qualified technician
for service.
If your vehicle has this feature you can lock
and unlock your doors and disarm or arm your
theft-deterrent system from about 3 feet (1 m) up to
30 feet (9 m) away using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 115 for additional information.
UNLOCK: Press this
button to unlock the
driver’s door and turn
on the interior lamps.
The parking lamps may
also flash, and the
horn may chirp, when
this button is pressed.
Press the unlock button again within three
seconds and all of the doors will unlock.
LOCK: Press this button to lock all the doors.
The parking lamps may also flash and the
horn may chirp when this button is pressed.
103
If a door is open or ajar when the lock button
is pressed, the horn will chirp several times to let
you know the doors did not lock and the content
theft-deterrent system is not armed. Pressing
the lock button again while the horn is chirping
or within three seconds after the horn stops
sounding, the doors will lock but the content
theft-deterrent system will not arm until the
opened door is closed.
You can program different feedback modes
through the Driver Information Center (DIC).
To program the feedback modes, see “Remote
Keyless Entry Feedback” under DIC Controls
and Displays on page 198.
L (Panic): Press this button to make the horn
sound and the headlamps and taillamps flash
for up to 30 seconds. To turn them off again, do
one of these three things: wait for 30 seconds;
press the panic button again; or start the vehicle.
104
Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent
another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased through your dealer/retailer.
Remember to bring any remaining transmitters
with you when you go to your dealer/retailer.
When the dealer/retailer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining
transmitters must also be matched. Once your
dealer/retailer has coded the new transmitter,
the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum
of four transmitters matched to it.
Battery Replacement
To replace the battery:
Under normal use, the battery in your RKE
transmitter should last about two years.
The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work
at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter
works, it is probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use
care not to touch any of the circuitry.
Static from your body transferred to these
surfaces may damage the transmitter.
1. Insert a thin coin, or similar object, in the slot
between the covers of the transmitter housing.
Gently pry the transmitter apart.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a
three-volt CR2032 or equivalent battery.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Check the operation of the transmitter.
105
Doors and Locks
CAUTION:
Door Locks
• Young children who get into unlocked
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children,
can easily open the doors and fall out
of a moving vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not open it.
You increase the chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash
if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
CAUTION:
106
(Continued)
(Continued)
vehicles may be unable to get out.
A child can be overcome by extreme
heat and can suffer permanent injuries
or even death from heat stroke.
Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors
can help prevent this from happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock
your vehicle.
To lock or unlock the door from the outside,
use the key in the driver’s or front passenger’s
door or press the lock or unlock button on
the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter.
Power Door Locks
If your vehicle has
power door locks,
the switches are
located on the
driver’s and the
front passenger’s
armrests.
To lock a door from the inside, push the
manual lever on the door forward. To unlock
a door from the inside, push the lever on the
door rearward.
You will see a colored area on the lever when
the door is unlocked.
Driver’s Switch Shown,
Front Passenger’s
Switch Similar
Press L (lock) to lock all the doors at once.
To unlock all the doors, press U (unlock).
On crew cab models, use the manual door lock
lever on each rear door to lock or unlock the
doors from the rear seating areas.
107
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Rear Door Security Locks
(Crew Cab)
If your vehicle has power door locks and the
remote keyless entry system, it has an automatic
lock/unlock feature.
If your vehicle is a crew cab model, it may have
rear door security locks. With this feature, you can
lock the rear doors so they cannot be opened
from the inside.
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission,
it is programmed from the factory to lock all doors
automatically when the shift lever is moved out
of PARK (P). All the doors will unlock when
the shift lever is moved back into PARK (P).
If your vehicle has a manual transmission, it is
programmed from the factory to lock all the
doors when the vehicle speed is greater than
15 mph (24 km/h). The doors will unlock when
the key is removed from the ignition.
To change the automatic door lock and unlock
settings, see “Automatic Door Locks” under
DIC Controls and Displays on page 198.
108
The rear door security
lock is located on
the inside edge of each
rear door below the
security lock label.
To engage the security locks, do the following:
Lockout Protection
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. Using your ignition key, turn the lock to
the horizontal position.
If you have power door locks, this feature protects
you from locking your key in the vehicle when
the key is in the ignition and a door is open.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat these steps on the other rear door.
If the power door lock switch is pressed when
a door is open and the key is in the ignition,
all of the doors will lock and then the driver’s
door will unlock.
If you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, unlock the door and open the door
from the outside.
To disengage the security locks, do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. Using your ignition key, turn the lock to the
vertical position.
Rear Doors (Extended Cab)
To open a rear door, open the front door.
Then, use the handle located on the front edge
of the rear door panel to open it. You must close
the rear door before closing the front door.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat these steps on the other rear door.
109
Tailgate
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride on the
tailgate, even when the vehicle is operated
at low speeds. People riding on the
tailgate can easily lose their balance and
fall in response to vehicle maneuvers.
Falling from a moving vehicle may result
in serious injuries or death. Do not allow
people to ride on the tailgate. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
You can open the tailgate by pulling up on the
outside handle while pulling the tailgate down.
When you put the tailgate back up, be sure
it latches securely.
You can lock the tailgate using your ignition key.
Turn the key counterclockwise to lock the
tailgate. Turn the key clockwise to unlock the
tailgate.
110
Removing the Tailgate
Follow these steps if you want to remove the
tailgate:
1. With the tailgate fully open, lift up slightly
on the entire tailgate assembly.
Remove the retaining
cables from both sides of
the tailgate by pulling the
clips away from the bolt
heads while pushing the
cable bracket forward.
When the larger part of
the hole on the bracket
is over the bolt, slide the
bracket off of the bolt.
2. With the tailgate partially down, lift up on
the passenger’s side and pull the tailgate
toward you, then move the tailgate to the
right to release the driver’s side. You can
then remove the entire tailgate assembly.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the tailgate.
Make sure it is secure.
To partially lower the tailgate do the following:
1. With the tailgate fully open, lift up slightly
on the entire tailgate assembly.
2. Remove the
retaining cable
from the passenger
side of the tailgate
by pulling the
clip away from the
bolt head while
pushing the cable
bracket forward.
Tailgate Partially Down
When the larger part of the hole on the bracket
is over the bolt, slide the bracket off of the bolt.
3. Slide the lower end fitting onto the top bolt.
The tailgate will now stay in the partially
opened position.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the driver side.
If you would like to close the tailgate, the bracket
cannot be in the partially opened position and
must be anchored on the bottom bolt, using the
top position on the bracket.
111
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome by
the extreme heat and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.
Manual Windows
On a vehicle with manual windows, use the
handle on each door to open and close each
window.
112
Power Windows
The power window
switches for all windows
are located on the
driver’s door armrest.
In addition, each
passenger’s door has
its own switch.
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome from
extreme heat in warm or hot weather and
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could operate
the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows
will function with the keys in the ignition
and they could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
When there are children in the rear seat
use the window lockout button to prevent
unintentional operation of the windows.
Crew Cab Switches
Shown
The power windows will work when the ignition
is in ACC (Accessory) or ON or while Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 121.
Pull the front of the switch up to raise the window.
Press the front of the switch down to lower the
window.
Do not hold all four power window switches
down for several seconds after the windows
have been completely lowered or raised,
because the vehicle may blow a fuse.
113
Express-Down Windows
Sliding Rear Window
The driver’s window has an express-down
feature that allows the window to be lowered
fully without continuously holding the switch.
Press the front of the switch past the first
position to activate the express-down mode.
The express-down mode can be canceled at
any time by pulling up on the switch.
Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout): If you have a crew cab
vehicle with power windows, you will also
have a window lockout button located forward
of the window switches. This feature disables the
passenger’s window switches when the window
lockout button is pressed. To turn the lockout
feature on or off, press the window lockout button.
A red band on the side of the button can be
seen when the windows are not locked out.
114
If your vehicle has this feature, squeeze the latch
in the center of the window and slide the glass
to open it.
When you close the window, be sure the latch is
engaged.
Sun Visors
To block glare, pull the sun visor down. It can also
be detached from the center mount and moved
to the side to block glare from that direction.
Visor Vanity Mirror
The passenger’s side sun visor may have a
mirror. Pull down the visor to access the mirror.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we
put on it can make it impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
If your vehicle has
the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) system,
the vehicle has a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
To activate the content theft-deterrent system:
1. Close all the doors.
2. Lock the doors with the RKE transmitter.
The security light, located on the instrument
panel cluster, will flash.
If the lock button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed, but a door is open, the horn will chirp
six times. Press the lock button again, within
three seconds, and the doors will lock. Close the
open door and the system will be activated.
115
If a locked door is not opened using the RKE
transmitter, or by OnStar®, the pre-alarm will
go off. If the engine is not started or unlock not
pressed within 10 seconds, the front turn
signal lamps will flash for two minutes, and the
horn will sound for two minutes, then will turn off
to save the battery power.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system will not
activate if you lock the doors with a key, the
manual door lock, or power door lock switch.
The system can only be activated using the
RKE transmitter, or by OnStar®. See OnStar®
System on page 149 for additional information.
You should also remember that you can start your
vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm
has been set off.
Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by
accident:
• If you do not want to activate the
theft-deterrent system, the vehicle should be
locked with the door key after the doors
are closed.
• Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will set off
the alarm.
116
If you set off the alarm by accident, you can turn
off the alarm by pressing unlock on the RKE
transmitter. The alarm will not stop if you try to
unlock a door any other way.
Testing the Alarm
To test the alarm:
1. From inside the vehicle, activate the system
by locking the doors with the RKE transmitter.
2. Unlock the door with the manual door lock and
open the door. This should set off the alarm.
3. To turn the alarm off, press the unlock button
on the RKE transmitter or start the engine.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but
the lights flash, check to see if the horn works.
The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,
see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 433.
If the alarm does not sound or the front turn signal
lamps do not flash, see your dealer/retailer for
service.
Passlock®
Your vehicle has the Passlock® theft-deterrent
system.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder
is turned with a valid key. If an incorrect key is
used or the ignition lock cylinder is tampered with,
the fuel system is disabled and the vehicle will
not start.
During normal operation, the security light will turn
off approximately five seconds after the engine
is started. See Security Light on page 196.
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes,
wait about 10 minutes until the light stops
flashing before trying to restart the engine.
Remember to release the key from START as
soon as the engine starts.
If the engine does not start after three tries,
the vehicle needs service.
If the engine is running and the security light
comes on, you will be able to restart the engine if
you turn the engine off. However, your Passlock®
system is not working properly and must be
serviced by your dealer/retailer. Your vehicle is
not protected by Passlock® at this time. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
In an emergency, call the Roadside Assistance
Center. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 466.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms
or deactivates the theft deterrent system in
the vehicle.
117
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an
elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in
the long run if you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h)
or less for the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles
(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.
Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,
the vehicle.
118
• Avoid making hard stops for the
first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this
time the new brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with new linings
can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new
brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in.
See Towing a Trailer on page 306 for
the trailer towing capabilities of your
vehicle and more information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load
can be gradually increased.
Ignition Positions
With the key in
the ignition switch,
you can turn to
four different
positions.
LOCK (A): This position locks the ignition. It also
locks the transmission on automatic transmission
vehicles. It will locks the steering wheel on manual
transmission vehicles when the key is removed.
It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only be
able to remove your key when the ignition is
turned to LOCK.
If you have an automatic transmission, the ignition
switch cannot be turned to LOCK unless the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from
the ignition switch could cause damage
or break the key. Use the correct key and turn
the key only with your hand. Make sure the
key is all the way in. If it is, turn the steering
wheel left and right while you turn the key
hard. If none of this works, then your vehicle
needs service.
ACC (ACCESSORY) (B): This is the position in
which you can operate your electrical accessories
or items plugged into the accessory power
outlets. On automatic transmission vehicles,
this position unlocks the ignition. On manual
transmission vehicles, it unlocks the ignition and
steering wheel. Use this position if your vehicle
must be pushed or towed.
119
ON (C): This is the position that the switch
returns to after you start your engine and release
the switch. The switch stays in ON when the
engine is running. But even when the engine is
not running, you can use ON to operate the
electrical accessories and to display some
instrument panel cluster warning and indicator
lights. The transmission is also unlocked in
this position on automatic transmission vehicles.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in
the ACC or ON position with the engine off. You
may not be able to start your vehicle if the battery is
allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
START (D): This is the position that starts the
engine. When the engine starts, release the key.
The ignition switch returns to ON for driving.
When the engine is not running, ACC and ON
allows you to operate the electrical accessories,
such as the radio or items plugged into the
accessory power outlets.
120
A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s
door when the ignition is in ACC or LOCK and
the key is in the ignition.
Key In the Ignition
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it
is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you
leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,
a chime will sound, when you open the driver’s
door. Always remember to remove your key from
the ignition and take it with you. This will lock
your ignition and transmission. Also, always
remember to lock the doors.
The battery could be drained if you leave the
key in the ignition while your vehicle is parked.
You may not be able to start your vehicle after
it has been parked for an extended period
of time.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Manual Transmission
These vehicle accessories can be used for up
to 20 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Audio System
• Wipers
• Power Windows
These features work when the key is in ON or
ACC. Once the key is turned from ON to LOCK,
power to these features continue to work for
up to 20 minutes or until a door is opened.
The shift lever should be in the NEUTRAL position
and the parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch
pedal to the floor and start the engine. Your
vehicle will not start if the clutch pedal is not all
the way down. That is a safety feature.
Starting the Engine
Place the transmission in the proper gear.
Automatic Transmission
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position – this
is a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
the transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when
your vehicle is stopped.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn
the ignition key to START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go
down as the engine gets warm. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate
the engine and transmission gently to allow the
oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled
Cranking System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects components.
If the ignition key is turned to the START
position, and then released when the engine
begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle
starts. If the engine does not start and the
key is held in START for many seconds,
cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds
to prevent cranking motor damage.
121
To prevent gear damage, this system also
prevents cranking if the engine is already
running. Engine cranking can be stopped
by turning the ignition switch to the ACC or
LOCK position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods
of time, by returning the key to the START
position immediately after cranking has ended,
can overheat and damage the cranking
motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F
or −18°C), it could be flooded with too
much gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and holding
it there as you hold the key in START for
up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator.
122
If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops
again, do the same thing. This clears the
extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race
the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently
until the oil warms up and lubricates all
moving parts.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with
the electronics in your vehicle. If you add
electrical parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine operates. Before
adding electrical equipment, check with
your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your
vehicle’s warranty.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may have this feature.
In very cold weather, 0°F (–18°C) or colder, the
engine coolant heater can help. You will get easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine
warm-up. Usually, the coolant heater should
be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to
starting your vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F
(0°C), use of the coolant heater is not required.
Your vehicle may also have an internal thermostat
in the plug end of the cord. This will prevent
operation of the engine coolant heater when the
temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as
noted on the cord.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical
cord. The cord is located in the engine
compartment behind the underhood fuse block
on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded
outlet could cause an electrical shock.
Also, the wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug the cord
into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not
reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts. If you do
not, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater
plugged in? The answer depends on the outside
temperature, the kind of oil you have, and
some other things. Instead of trying to list
everything here, we ask that you contact your
dealer/retailer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give you
the best advice for that particular area.
123
Automatic Transmission Operation
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels.
It is the best position to use when you start
your engine because your vehicle cannot
move easily.
{CAUTION:
Your automatic transmission has a shift lever on
the steering column.
It features an electronic shift position indicator
within the instrument cluster. This display must
be powered anytime the shift lever is capable
of being moved out of PARK (P). This means that
if your key is turned off, but not in LOCK, there
will be a small current drain on your battery which
could discharge your battery over a period of
time. If you need to leave your key in the ignition
but not in LOCK for an extended period, it is
recommended that you disconnect the battery
cable from the battery to prevent discharging
your battery.
There are several different positions for your
shift lever.
124
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. Your
vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have to.
If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle
will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever
to PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transmission) on page 135.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing
a Trailer on page 306.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)
before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an
automatic transmission shift lock control system.
You must fully apply your regular brakes before
you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition
key is in ON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),
ease pressure on the shift lever by pushing
the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as
you maintain brake application. Then move the
shift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out
of Park (P) (Automatic Transmission) on page 137.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only
after your vehicle is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out
of snow, ice, or sand without damaging your
transmission, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 290.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does
not connect with the wheels. To restart when
you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on
the brake pedal, your vehicle could move
very rapidly. You could lose control and
hit people or objects. Do not shift into a
drive gear while your engine is running
at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at
high speed may damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Be sure the engine is not running
at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
125
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
If provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.
If you need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push
your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push
the accelerator all the way down.
You will shift down to the next gear and have
more power.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”
under Loss of Control on page 259.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it reduces vehicle speed
more than DRIVE (D) without using your brakes.
You might choose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D)
when driving on hilly, winding roads, when
towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between
gears and when going down a steep hill.
SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speed
even more than THIRD (3) without using your
brakes. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can
help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
126
FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speed
even more than SECOND (2) without using
your brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, or
in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in
FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward, the
transmission will not shift into first gear until the
vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the
vehicle in one place on a hill using only
the accelerator pedal may damage the
transmission. The repair will not be covered by
your warranty. If you are stuck, do not spin
the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Manual Transmission Operation
This is your
shift pattern.
Here is how to operate your manual transmission:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal
as you slowly press down on the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going
less than 20 mph (30 km/h). If you have come to a
complete stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1),
put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the
clutch. Then press the clutch pedal back down and
shift into FIRST (1).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you
let up on the accelerator pedal and shift into
SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
THIRD, FOURTH AND FIFTH (3, 4 and 5):
Shift into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5)
the same way you do for SECOND (2). Slowly
let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or
idle your engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutch pedal.
After the vehicle stops, shift into REVERSE (R).
Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal. If it is hard to shift, let the shift
lever return to NEUTRAL and release the clutch
pedal. Then press the clutch again and shift into
REVERSE (R). Do not attempt to shift into the fifth
gear position prior to shifting into REVERSE (R).
Your transmission has a lock out feature which
prevents a fifth gear to reverse gear shift.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage
the transmission. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Shift to
REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
Use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake,
for parking your vehicle.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press
the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,
press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal,
and shift to NEUTRAL.
127
Up-Shift Light
This light will show
you when to shift to
the next higher gear
for best fuel economy.
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and has a
manual transmission, disregard the shift light
when the transfer case is in four-wheel low.
For more information, see Up-Shift Light
(Manual Transmission) on page 189.
Shift Speeds
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions
permit. For the best fuel economy, accelerate
slowly and shift when the light comes on.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light
to go on and off if you quickly change the
position of the accelerator. Ignore the shift
light when you downshift.
128
{CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift,
you could lose control of your vehicle.
You could injure yourself or others.
Do not shift down more than one gear
at a time when you downshift.
Four-Wheel Drive
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send
your engine’s driving power to all four wheels for
extra traction. To get the best performance out of
four-wheel drive, you must be familiar with its
operation. Read the part that follows before using
four-wheel drive. You should use two-wheel-drive
high for most normal driving conditions.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in
four-wheel drive for an extended period of
time can cause premature wear on your
vehicle’s powertrain. Do not drive on clean,
dry pavement in Four-Wheel Drive for
extended periods of time.
Notice: If your vehicle has four-wheel drive
and the compact spare tire is installed on
your vehicle, do not drive in four-wheel drive
until you can have your flat tire repaired and/or
replaced. You could damage your vehicle,
and the repair costs would not be covered
by your warranty. Never use four-wheel drive
when the compact spare tire is installed
on your vehicle.
The transfer case buttons are located to the right
of the steering wheel on the instrument panel.
Recommended Transfer Case Settings
Driving Conditions
Normal
Severe
Extreme
Transfer Case Settings
2
m
4
m
4
n
N
YES
YES
YES
Vehicle in Tow*
YES
*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 300
or Towing Your Vehicle on page 299 for further
information.
129
Use these buttons to shift into and out of four-wheel
drive. You can choose from the following:
2 m(Two-Wheel High): This setting is for driving
in most street and highway situations. Your
front axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive.
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL
can cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P), or if you
have a manual transmission, even if you
are in gear. You or someone else could
be seriously injured. Be sure to set the
parking brake before placing the transfer
case in NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake
on page 133.
N (NEUTRAL): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case
to NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle.
4 m(Four-Wheel High): This setting engages
your front axle to help drive your vehicle. Use
four-wheel high when you need extra traction,
such as on snowy or icy roads, or in most off-road
situations.
4 n(Four-Wheel Low): This setting also
engages your front axle to give you extra traction.
It sends the maximum power to all four wheels.
You might choose four-wheel low if you were
driving off-road in sand, mud, or deep snow and
while climbing or descending steep hills.
Indicator lights in the buttons show you which
setting you are in. The indicator lights will come
on briefly when you turn on the ignition and
one will stay on the selected setting. If the lights
do not come on, you should take your vehicle in for
service. An indicator light will flash while shifting.
It will stay on when the shift is completed.
If for some reason the transfer case does not shift,
it will return to the last chosen setting.
Shifting from Two-Wheel High to
Four-Wheel High
Press and release the Four-Wheel High button.
This can be done at any speed, and the front
axle will lock automatically.
130
Shifting from Four-Wheel High to
Two-Wheel High
Press and release the Two-Wheel High button.
This can be done at any speed, and the front
axle will unlock automatically.
It is normal to hear and feel your vehicle’s transfer
case shift into Four-Wheel High. If you shift with
the vehicle stopped, the indicator light may
still flash slowly. It may be necessary to shift the
transmission momentarily into REVERSE (R)
and DRIVE (D), for an automatic transmission,
or REVERSE (R) and FIRST (1) for a manual
transmission to have the light stop flashing.
Shifting from Two-Wheel High or
Four-Wheel High to Four-Wheel Low
To shift from Two-Wheel High or Four-Wheel High
to Four-Wheel Low, the vehicle must be stopped
or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N) for an automatic
transmission or the clutch pedal pressed for
a manual transmission. The preferred method for
shifting into Four-Wheel Low is to have your
vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).
Press and release the Four-Wheel Low button.
You must wait for the Four-Wheel Low indicator
light to stop flashing and stay on before shifting
the transmission into gear or releasing the
clutch pedal.
If the Four-Wheel Low button is pressed when
your vehicle is in gear and/or moving faster
than 3 mph (5 km/h), the four-wheel low indicator
light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete
the shift.
Shifting from Four-Wheel Low to
Two-Wheel High or Four-Wheel High
To shift from Four-Wheel Low to Two-Wheel
High or Four-Wheel High, your vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h)
with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) for
an automatic transmission or the clutch pedal
pressed for a manual transmission. The preferred
method for shifting out of four-wheel low is
to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h).
131
Press and release the Four-Wheel High or
Two-Wheel High button. You must wait for the
Four-Wheel High or Two-Wheel High indicator light
to stop flashing and stay on before shifting the
transmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal.
If the Four-Wheel High or Two-Wheel High button
is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and/or
moving faster than 3 mph (5km/h), the Four-Wheel
High or Two Wheel High indicator light will flash
for 30 seconds but not complete the shift.
Shifting to NEUTRAL
Use NEUTRAL when you plan to tow your vehicle.
See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 300
for towing instructions. To shift the transfer case
into NEUTRAL do the following:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Start the vehicle.
3. Press the regular brake pedal and shift
the transmission in NEUTRAL (N), or
press in the clutch for vehicles with a
manual transmission.
132
4. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel High.
5. Press and hold the Two-Wheel High and
Four-Wheel Low buttons at the same time
for 10 seconds. The NEUTRAL (N) light
will come on when the transfer case shift to
NEUTRAL (N) is complete.
6. Press and hold the regular brake pedal and
shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for
one second, then shift the transmission
to DRIVE (D) for one second, or FIRST (1) for
vehicles with manual transmissions, and let
out the clutch to insure the transfer case is in
NEUTRAL. If the vehicle is not in NEUTRAL,
repeat this procedure starting at Step 3.
7. Turn the engine off by turning the key to ACC.
8. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P),
or FIRST (1) for vehicles that have a manual
transmission.
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
After towing your vehicle, you will have to shift
out of NEUTRAL in order to drive. To shift out
of NEUTRAL, do the following:
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular
brake pedal.
2. Start a vehicle with an automatic transmission
in PARK (P). Use FIRST (1) for vehicles with
a manual transmission.
3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N), or
press the clutch pedal for vehicles with a
manual transmission.
4. Press the button for the desired transfer case
shift position (Two-Wheel High, Four-Wheel
High, or Four-Wheel Low).
5. After the transfer case has shifted out of
NEUTRAL, the indicator light will go out.
6. Release the parking brake.
7. Shift the transmission to the desired position.
Parking Brake
The parking brake
pedal is located to
the left of the regular
brake pedal, near
the driver’s door.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular
brake pedal down with your right foot. Push the
parking brake pedal down to its fully-applied
position with your left foot.
A chime will activate and the brake warning
light, located on the instrument panel, will flash
when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle
is moving at least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at least
three seconds. The chime will deactivate and the
light will turn off when the parking brake is set
and the vehicle is moving below 3 mph (5 km/h).
See Brake System Warning Light on page 189.
133
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is
released, the brake system warning light will
go off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on
can overheat the brake system and cause
premature wear or damage to brake system
parts. Verify that the parking brake is fully
released and the brake warning light is
off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on
any hill, see Towing a Trailer on page 306.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular
brake pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of
the lever, located above the parking brake pedal,
with the parking brake symbol, directly rearward
to release the parking brake.
134
Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transmission)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could
be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, use the steps that follow.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing
a Trailer on page 306.
{CAUTION:
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle
will be free to roll — even if your shift
lever is in PARK (P) — if your transfer
case is in NEUTRAL. So, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear, two-wheel
high (2H) or four-wheel high (4H) or
four-wheel low (4L) — not in NEUTRAL.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by
pulling the lever toward you and moving
it up as far as it will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you.
If you can leave your vehicle with the
key, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right
foot and set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on page 133 for more
information.
135
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle
could move suddenly if the shift lever is
not fully in PARK (P) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or
others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)
and your parking brake is firmly set before you
leave it. After you have moved the shift lever
into PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.
Then, see if you can move the shift lever away
from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you.
If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
136
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift
your transmission into PARK (P) properly,
the weight of the vehicle may put too much
force on the parking pawl in the transmission.
You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out
of PARK (P). This is called torque lock. To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift
into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into
Park (P) (Automatic Transmission) on page 135.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) before you release the
parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to
have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to
take some of the pressure from the parking pawl
in the transmission, so you can pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park (P)
(Automatic Transmission)
3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the gear
you want.
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift
lock control system which locks the shift lever
in PARK (P) when the ignition is in the LOCK
position. In addition, you have to fully apply the
regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition is in ON. See Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 124.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transmission)
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever by pushing the shift lever all
the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake
application. Then, move the shift lever into
the gear you want.
Your vehicle has a manual transmission.
Before you get out of your vehicle, move the
shift lever into REVERSE (R), and firmly apply
the parking brake. Once the shift lever has
been placed into REVERSE (R) with the clutch
pedal pressed in, turn the ignition key to LOCK,
remove the key and release the clutch.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still
cannot shift out of PARK (P), try this:
If you are parking on a hill, or if your vehicle is
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 306.
1. Turn the key to ACC. There is no shift
interlock in this key position.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of
Step 4.
137
Parking Over Things That Burn
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot
exhaust parts under your vehicle and
ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,
dry grass, or other things that can burn.
138
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Your vehicle was damaged when
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the
gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you
cannot see or smell. It can cause
unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a
collision.
CAUTION:
driving over high points on the road
or over road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system
has been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming
into your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows
down to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
(Continued)
139
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution
under Engine Exhaust on page 139.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your
vehicle even if the climate control fan is
at the highest setting. One place this
can happen is a garage. Exhaust — with
CO — can come in easily. NEVER park
in a garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 286.
140
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the automatic transmission shift
lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have to.
If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle
will not move, even when it is on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake
and move the automatic transmission
shift lever to PARK (P), or the manual
transmission shift lever to NEUTRAL.
Mirrors
{CAUTION:
Manual Rearview Mirror
Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer
case in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to
roll, even if the automatic transmission
shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear — not in
NEUTRAL. Always set the parking brake.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle
will not move. See Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transmission) on page 135.
While sitting in a comfortable driving position,
adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind
your vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move
it up or down and side to side. The control at
the bottom of the mirror is the day/night feature
that allows adjustment to the mirror so that
the glare of headlamps from behind is reduced.
Push the control for daytime use; pull it for
night use.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 306.
141
Manual Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
Mirror Operation
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror with OnStar®, Compass
and Temperature Display
Your vehicle may have a manual rearview mirror
with the OnStar® System. You can adjust the mirror
for day or night driving. Press the tab forward for
day driving. Pull the tab back for night driving.
Your vehicle may have this feature. When on,
the automatic dimming mirror dims to the proper
level to minimize glare from lights behind you
after dark.
There are also three OnStar® buttons located at
the bottom of the mirror. See your dealer for more
information on the system and how to subscribe
to OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 149
for more information about the services OnStar®
provides.
The mirror has a dual display in the upper right
corner of the mirror face that shows the compass
reading and the outside temperature.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or
similar material dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the
mirror housing.
142
Control buttons for the OnStar® system are at the
bottom of the mirror. See OnStar® System on
page 149 for more information about the services
OnStar® provides.
P (On/Off): This is the on/off button.
Temperature and Compass Display
Press the on/off button, located to the far
left, briefly to turn the compass/temperature
display on or off.
If the display reads CAL, the compass needs
to be calibrated. For more information, see
“Compass Calibration” following.
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius:
1. Press and hold the on/off button for
approximately four seconds until either
a flashing F or C appears.
2. Press the button again to change the display
to the desired unit of measurement. After
approximately four seconds of inactivity,
the new unit will be locked in and the
compass/temperature display will return.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed
for an extended period of time, see your
dealer/retailer. Under certain circumstances, a
delay in updating the temperature is normal.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming mirror comes on each time
the ignition is turned to start. To turn the automatic
dimming feature off or back on, press the on/off
button. The indicator light on the mirror is lit when
the automatic dimming feature is on.
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
• After approximately five seconds, the display
does not show a compass heading, N for
North, for example, there may be a strong
magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Such interference may be caused by a
magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note
pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct
heading and the compass zone variance
is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed
in the mirror compass windows. If CAL is
not displayed, push the on/off button for
approximately 12 seconds or until CAL is
displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the
vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until
the display reads a direction.
143
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the
factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass
to compensate for compass variance if the
vehicle is outside of zone eight. Under certain
circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust
for compass variance. Compass variance is
the difference between earth’s magnetic north and
true geographic north. If not adjusted to account
for compass variance, the compass could
give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance
zone number on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and
a zone number appears in the display.
The compass is now in zone mode.
3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the
desired zone number appears in the display.
Release the button. After approximately
four seconds of inactivity, the new zone
number will be locked in and the compass/
temperature display will return.
144
Cleaning the Mirror
Temperature Display
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or
similar material dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror
as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
The temperature can be displayed by pressing
the compass/temperature button. Pressing the
compass/temperature button once briefly, will
toggle the display reading on and off. To alternate
the temperature reading between Fahrenheit and
Celsius, press and hold the compass/temperature
button for approximately three seconds until
the display blinks F and C. After approximately
five seconds of inactivity, the display will stop
blinking and display the last selection made.
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror with Compass and
Temperature Display
Your vehicle may have this mirror. When on,
an automatic dimming mirror will dim to the
proper level to minimize glare from lights behind
you after dark.
If an abnormal reading is displayed, see your
dealer/retailer.
The mirror also includes a dual display in the
upper right corner of the mirror with the compass
reading and the outside temperature.
dimming feature on or off. The indicator light to
the left of the button will turn on to indicate when
the feature is on. Once the mirror is turned off,
it will remain off until it is turned back on, or until
the vehicle is restarted.
Yb: Briefly press this button to turn the display
on or off.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
O: Press this button to turn the automatic
Compass Operation
Press the compass/temperature button once
briefly to turn the display on or off.
145
Compass Calibration
Compass Variance
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.
• After approximately five seconds, the display
does not show a compass heading, N for
North, for example, there may be a strong
magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Such interference may be caused by a
magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note
pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct
heading and the compass zone variance
is set correctly.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the
factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass
to compensate for compass variance if the
vehicle is outside zone eight. Under certain
circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust
for compass variance. Compass variance is
the difference between earth’s magnetic north and
true geographic north. If not adjusted to account
for compass variance, your compass could
give false readings.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed
in the mirror compass windows. If CAL is
not displayed, push in the compass/temperature
button for approximately nine seconds or until
CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the
vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until
the display reads a direction.
146
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance
zone number on the following zone map.
Cleaning the Mirror
Use a paper towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid
cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Outside Manual Mirrors
If the vehicle has manual outside mirrors, adjust
them by hand so that the side of the vehicle can
be seen while you are sitting in a comfortable
driving position.
2. Press and hold the compass/temperature
button for six seconds until a zone number
appears in the display.
3. Press the compass/temperature button on the
bottom of the mirror until the new zone number
appears in the display. After you stop pressing
the button, the display will show a compass
direction within a few seconds.
The mirrors can be folded inward to prevent
damage when going through an automatic car
wash. To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle.
To return the mirror to its original position, push
outward. Return both mirrors to the unfolded
position before driving.
147
Outside Power Mirrors
If your vehicle has
this feature, the controls
are located on the
driver’s door armrest.
If the mirror begins making a ratcheting sound, the
mirror has reached the end of its travel and can go
no farther in that direction. To stop the sound,
reverse the mirror direction using the control pad.
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to
prevent damage when going through an automatic
car wash. To fold, push the mirror toward the
vehicle. To return the mirror to its original position,
push outward. Be sure to return both mirrors to
the unfolded position before driving.
Outside Convex Mirror
To adjust the power mirrors, do the following:
1. Move the selector switch to the L (left)
or R (right) to choose the driver’s or
passenger’s mirror.
2. Use the arrows located on the four-way
control pad to move the mirror in the
direction you want the mirror to go.
3. Return the selector switch to the center
position once the mirrors are adjusted.
148
Your passenger’s outside rearview mirror is
convex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so
you can see more from the driver’s seat.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like
other vehicles) look farther away than they
really are. If you cut too sharply into the
right lane, you could hit a vehicle on your
right. Check your inside mirror or glance
over your shoulder before changing lanes.
OnStar® System
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and
live advisors to provide you with a wide range
of safety, security, information, and convenience
services. If your airbags deploy, the system is
designed to make an automatic call to OnStar®
Emergency advisors who can request emergency
services be sent to your location. If you lock
your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal
to unlock your doors. If you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar® button and
they can contact Roadside Service for you.
OnStar® service is provided to you subject
to the OnStar® Terms and Conditions. You
may cancel your OnStar® service at any time
by contacting OnStar® as provided below.
A complete OnStar® Owner’s Guide and the
OnStar® Terms and Conditions are included
in the vehicle’s OnStar® Subscriber glove box
literature. For more information, visit onstar.com
or onstar.ca, contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or
press the OnStar® button to speak with an
OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Not all OnStar® features are available on all
vehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped to
provide the services described below, or for a
full description of OnStar® services and system
limitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in
your glove box or visit onstar.com.
149
OnStar® Services
®
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar , the Safe
& Sound Plan, or the Directions & Connections®
Plan is included for one year from the date of
purchase. You can extend this plan beyond
the first year, or upgrade to the Directions &
Connections® Plan. For more information, press
the OnStar® button to speak with an advisor.
Some OnStar® services (such as Remote Door
Unlock or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance) may
not be available until you register with OnStar®.
Available Services with
Safe & Sound® Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification
(AACN) (If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
150
•
•
•
•
•
•
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
AccidentAssist
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics
GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
• OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Available Services included with
Directions & Connections® Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
or OnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation
(If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligible
OnStar® subscribers to make and receive calls
using voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully
integrated into the vehicle, and can be used with
OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages. Hands-Free
Calling may also be linked to a Verizon Wireless
service plan in the U.S. or a Bell Mobility service
plan in Canada, depending on eligibility. To find
out more, refer to the OnStar® Owner’s Guide
in the vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com
or www.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar®
advisor by pressing the OnStar® button or
calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Talk/Mute
button that can be used to interact with OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the
button for a few seconds and give the command
“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling feature.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be
used to dial numbers into voicemail systems,
or to dial phone extensions. See the OnStar®
Owner’s Guide for more information.
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
OnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to
access location-based weather, local traffic reports,
and stock quotes. By pressing the phone button
and giving a few simple voice commands, you
can browse through the various topics. See the
OnStar® Owner’s Guide for more information.
(Only available in the continental U.S.)
151
How OnStar® Service Works
In order to provide you with OnStar® services,
your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability
of recording and transmitting vehicle information.
This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®
button press, Emergency button press or if
your airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicle
information usually includes your GPS location
and, in the event of a crash, additional information
regarding the accident that your vehicle has
been involved in (e.g. the direction from which
your vehicle was hit). When you use the
Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling, your vehicle also sends OnStar® your
GPS location so that we can provide you
with location-based services.
152
OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicle
is in a place where OnStar® has an agreement
with a wireless service provider for service in that
area. OnStar® service also cannot work unless
you are in a place where the wireless service
provider OnStar® has hired for that area
has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that
is compatible with the OnStar® service. Not all
services are available everywhere, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas, or at all times.
OnStar® service that involves location information
about your vehicle cannot work unless GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed and available
in that place as well.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical
system (including adequate battery power) for
the OnStar® equipment to operate. There are
other problems OnStar® cannot control that
may prevent OnStar® from providing OnStar®
service to you at any particular time or place.
Some examples are damage to important parts
of your vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings,
tunnels, weather or wireless phone network
congestion.
Your Responsibility
You may need to increase the volume of your
radio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light
next to the OnStar® buttons is red, this means
that your system is not functioning properly
and should be checked by a dealer. If the light
appears clear (no light is appearing), your
OnStar® subscription has expired. You can
always press the blue OnStar® button to
confirm that your OnStar® equipment is active.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open the glove box, pull on the lever.
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle may have two cupholders located
on the lower part of the front doors as well as
two cupholders located at the front end of
the console. Vehicles with bench seats may
have cupholders attached to the front of the
center seat.
If your vehicle is an extended cab or crew cab
model, your vehicle also has two rear cupholders.
On crew cab models, the cupholders are located
at the front end of the rear center seat cushion.
On extended cab models, the rear seat cupholders
are located on top of the rear center console.
If you have an ashtray, it will use one of the
cupholders.
153
Front Armrest Storage Area
Assist Handles
For vehicles with bench seats, you may have a
center armrest storage area. Lift up on the upper
tab located at the front of the armrest to release
the latch. Lift the lid to open the storage area.
Your vehicle may have assist handles to be used
when getting out of your vehicle. If your vehicle
has assist handles, they are located above
the doors.
For vehicles with bucket seats or uplevel
packages, your vehicle may have a two-tiered
center armrest storage area. Lift up on the upper
tab located at the front of the armrest to release
the latch. Lift the lid to the top storage area.
A second tab is located below the top one and
allows you to access the bottom storage area.
Lift up on the lower tab to release the latch.
Then, raise the lid of the lower storage area.
The upper storage area will lift up with the lid
of the lower storage area.
If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impact
air bags, there are assist handles located above
both the driver’s and front passenger’s doors.
To close the storage area(s), lower the lid(s)
until you feel the latch close.
154
Rear Storage Area
If your vehicle is an extended cab model,
it might have storage compartments under
the rear seats.
To access the storage compartments, lift the
cushion on the bottom of the rear seats. This
exposes the storage boxes under the seat.
To open a storage box, unhook the bottom and
lift the two latches on each side of the storage box.
155
Sunroof
Your vehicle may have a sunroof.
The sunroof control
buttons are located
on the headliner.
Lift the lid from the center area to access the
storage box.
Q (Open/Vent): Press and hold this button
to vent, and open the sunroof. Release the button
when the desired position is reached.
R (Close): Press and hold this button to close
the sunroof. Release the button when the desired
position is reached.
The sunshade must be opened manually.
156
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 160
Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 162
Other Warning Devices ............................. 162
Horn .......................................................... 162
Tilt Wheel .................................................. 162
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 163
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 164
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 165
Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 165
Windshield Wipers ..................................... 165
Windshield Washer .................................... 166
Cruise Control ........................................... 166
Exterior Lamps .......................................... 170
Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 171
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 171
Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 172
Fog Lamps ................................................ 173
Exterior Cargo Lamps ................................ 174
Interior Lamps ........................................... 174
Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 174
Dome Lamp .............................................. 174
Dome Lamp Override ................................ 175
Exit Lighting .............................................. 175
Electric Power Management ...................... 175
Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 175
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 176
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 177
Climate Controls ......................................... 177
Climate Control System ............................. 177
Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 180
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 181
Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 182
Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 183
Trip Odometer ........................................... 183
Tachometer ............................................... 183
Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 184
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 184
Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 185
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 186
Battery Warning Light ................................ 188
Up-Shift Light (Manual Transmission) ........ 189
157
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Brake System Warning Light ..................... 189
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 190
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 191
Tire Pressure Light .................................... 191
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 192
Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 195
Security Light ............................................ 196
Cruise Control Light .................................. 196
Highbeam On Light ................................... 196
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Indicator Light ........................................ 197
Fuel Gage ................................................. 197
Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 198
DIC Controls and Displays ........................ 198
DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 202
158
Audio System(s) ......................................... 206
Setting the Time ........................................ 208
AM-FM Radio ............................................ 209
Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 212
Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................. 222
Using an MP3 ........................................... 234
XM Radio Messages ................................. 240
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 242
Radio Reception ........................................ 242
Care of Your CDs ..................................... 243
Care of the CD Player .............................. 243
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 244
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 244
Chime Level Adjustment ............................ 244
✍ NOTES
159
Instrument Panel Overview
Manual Transmission shown, Automatic Transmission similar
160
The main components of your vehicle’s instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on
page 180.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 163.
C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument
Panel Cluster on page 182.
D. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 162.
E. Passenger Side Airbag. See Airbag System
on page 77.
F. Exterior Lamp Controls. See Exterior Lamps
on page 170. Fog Lamps (If Equipped).
See Fog Lamps on page 173. Exterior
Cargo Lamps. See Exterior Cargo Lamps
on page 174.
G. Parking Brake Release. See Parking Brake
on page 133.
H. Horn. See Horn on page 162.
I. Traction Control Button or Four-Wheel Drive
Buttons. See Traction Control System (TCS) on
page 253 and Four-Wheel Drive on page 129.
J. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on
page 206.
K. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s)
and Cigarette Lighter on page 177.
L. Climate Control System. See Climate Control
System on page 177.
M. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory
Power Outlet(s) on page 176.
N. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 186.
O. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 153.
161
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
The hazard warning flashers let you warn the
police and others that you have a problem.
The front and rear turn signal lamps will flash
on and off.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up
at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)
behind your vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is
located on the
instrument panel,
between the
two air vents in
the center.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position the key is in, and even if the key is not
in the ignition.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button
again to turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the
turn signals will not work.
162
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbol on the
steering wheel pad.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. The tilt steering wheel can be
raised to the highest level to allow more room for
the driver to enter and exit the vehicle.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The tilt lever is located on the left side of the
steering column, under the turn signal lever.
To tilt, hold the steering wheel and pull the tilt lever
toward you. Move the wheel to a comfortable
level, then release the tilt lever to lock the wheel
in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 163.
• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 165.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 165.
• N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers
on page 165.
• L Windshield Washer. See Windshield
Washer on page 166.
• J Cruise Control. See Cruise Control on
page 166.
163
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up
or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
automatically return to the off position.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until
the change is completed. The lever will return by
itself when released.
An arrow on the
instrument panel
cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the
arrows flash more quickly than normal, a signal
bulb may be burned out and other drivers will
not see your vehicle’s turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when
signaling a turn, check for a burned-out bulb or a
blown fuse. For bulb replacement, see Taillamps,
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
on page 373. For a blown fuse or circuit breaker,
see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 433
Turn Signal On Chime
If a turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a
mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of
the turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL
will also appear in the DIC. To turn the chime and
message off, move the turn signal lever to the
off position.
See “TURN SIGNAL” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 202 for more information.
164
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
53 (Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer):
To change the headlamps from low to high beam,
push the lever toward the instrument panel.
To return to low-beam headlamps, pull the
multifunction lever toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams
are on, this indicator
light on the instrument
panel cluster will also
be on.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps
to signal a driver in front of you that you want to
pass. It works even if the headlamps are in the
automatic position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you,
then release it.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position
or on low beam, your high-beam headlamps will
turn on. They will stay on as long as you hold the
lever toward you. The high-beam indicator on the
instrument panel cluster will come on. Release
the lever to return to normal operation.
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the
band with the wiper symbol on it.
The windshield wipers work in all ignition positions,
except off. This includes the Retained Access
Power mode. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 121.
8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the band
to mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let
go. The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want
more wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
N (Delay): You can set the wiper speed for a
long or short delay between wipes. This can be very
useful in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose
the delay time. The closer to the top of the lever,
the shorter the delay.
165
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low
speed, turn the band away from you to the
first solid position past the delay settings.
1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping,
turn the band to the second solid position past
the delay settings.
9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
QL (Washer Fluid): There is a paddle marked
with the windshield washer symbol at the top
of the multifunction lever. To spray washer fluid on
the windshield, push the paddle. The wipers will
clear the window and then either stop or return to
your preset speed.
Cruise Control
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If they’re frozen to
the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them.
If your blades do become worn or damaged,
get new blades or blade inserts.
The cruise control
set button is located
at the end of the
multifunction lever.
Windshield Washer
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn
the system off.
R (On): Move the lever to this position to turn the
system on.
166
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Move the lever to this
position to make the vehicle accelerate or resume
to a previously set speed.
rT (Set): Press this button to set the speed.
With cruise control, the vehicle can maintain
a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more
without keeping your foot on the accelerator.
This can really help on long trips. Cruise
control does not work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake
is set, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level
is low.
If the brakes are applied, the cruise control
will shut off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System
(TCS) and it begins to limit wheel spin while
the cruise control is on, the cruise control will
automatically disengage. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 253. When road conditions
allow you to safely use it again, you can turn
cruise control back on.
167
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set the cruise control to a desired
speed and then you apply the brake. This turns off
the cruise control. But it does not need to be reset.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when
you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do not
want to. You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the cruise control switch
off until you want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control lever to the on position.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press the set button at the end of the
lever and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The cruise symbol on
the instrument panel will
be lit when the cruise
control is engaged.
168
Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, you can move the cruise control switch
briefly from on to resume/accelerate.
The vehicle will go right back up to your chosen
speed and stay there.
If you hold the lever at resume/accelerate the
vehicle will keep going faster until you release the
lever or apply the brake. Do not hold the lever
at resume/accelerate if you do not want the vehicle
to go faster.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of
the lever, then release the button and the
accelerator pedal. You will now cruise at the
higher speed. If the accelerator pedal is held
longer than 60 seconds, cruise control will
turn off.
• Move the cruise lever from on to resume/
accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to the
speed desired, and then release the lever.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the lever briefly to resume/accelerate.
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
• Press and hold the set button until you reach
the lower speed desired, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly
press the set button.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal,
the vehicle will slow down to the cruise control
speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work on hills
depends upon the vehicle speed, load, and the
steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,
you might want to step on the accelerator
pedal to maintain the vehicle speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a
lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down.
Of course, applying the brake turns off the cruise
control. Many drivers find this to be too much
trouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
To turn off the cruise control, do one of the following:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Move the cruise control lever to off.
• Lightly tap or press the clutch, if you have a
manual transmission.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
the cruise control set speed memory is erased.
169
Exterior Lamps
O (Exterior Lamps): Turn the knob, located to
the right of this symbol, to choose one of the
four exterior lamp positions.
9 (Off): Turn the knob to this position to turn off
all exterior lamps including the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL).
AUTO: Turn the knob to this position to
automatically turn on the headlamps at normal
brightness, together with the following:
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
• Parking Lamps
The control on the driver’s side of the instrument
panel operates the exterior lamps.
170
• Instrument Panel Lights
See Automatic Headlamp System on page 172 for
more information.
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the knob to this
position to turn on the parking lamps, together
with the following:
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
Headlamps on Reminder
2 (Headlamps): Turn the knob to this position to
turn on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
If your vehicle was first sold in Canada and
the parking lamps are turned on manually, the
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) will stay on.
You can switch the headlamps from low to high
beam by pushing the turn signal/multifunction lever
toward the instrument panel.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
If a door is open, a reminder chime will sound
when the headlamps or parking lamps are
manually turned on and your key is out of the
ignition. To turn off the chime, turn the headlamp
switch to off and then back on. In the automatic
mode, the headlamps turn off once the ignition
is in LOCK.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during
the day. DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, but they can be especially
helpful in the short periods after dawn and before
sunset. Fully functional daytime running lamps
are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
171
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• The transmission is not in PARK (P) if you
have an automatic transmission.
• The light sensor determines it is daytime.
Your vehicle will have either the parking lamps or
reduced intensity low beams used as the DRL.
When the DRL are on, only those lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarkers, and other lamps will
not be on. The instrument panel will not be lit
up either.
When it begins to get dark, the headlamps will
automatically switch from DRL to the regular
headlamps.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the
regular headlamp system when you need it.
172
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic
headlamp system will turn on after the
transmission has been shifted from PARK (P) to
DRIVE (D). The headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker,
parking lamps, roof marker lamps, and the
instrument panel lights will turn on at normal
brightness. The radio lights will become more dim
when the headlights are off compared to when
the headlights are on.
Your vehicle has a light sensor located on the
top of the instrument panel. Be sure it is not
covered, or the system will be on whenever the
ignition is on.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather, or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between
the daytime and nighttime operation of the
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and the automatic
headlamp system so that driving under bridges
or bright overhead street lights does not affect
the system. The DRL and automatic headlamp
system will only be affected when the light sensor
detects a change in lighting lasting longer than
the delay.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the
automatic headlamp system will come on
immediately. Once you leave the garage, it will
take about one minute for the automatic headlamp
system to change to DRL if it is light outside.
During that delay, the instrument panel cluster
may not be as bright as usual. Make sure
the instrument panel brightness control is in
the full bright position. See Instrument Panel
Brightness on page 174.
Fog Lamps
If your vehicle has fog lamps, you can use them
for better vision in foggy or misty conditions.
Your parking lamps and/or low-beam headlamps
must be on for your fog lamps to work.
The fog lamp button is
located near the exterior
lamps control.
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on while
the headlamps or parking lamps are on. Press the
button again to turn them off. An indicator light
will glow in the button when the fog lamps are on.
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as
much light as your headlamps. Never use your fog
lamps in the dark without turning on the headlamps.
The fog lamps will go off whenever your
high-beam headlamps come on. When the high
beams go off, the fog lamps will come on again.
Some localities have laws that require the
headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.
173
Exterior Cargo Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
The cargo lamps can be used if more light is
needed in the cargo area of the vehicle or in the
top-box storage units.
D (Instrument Panel Lights): Turn the
Press this button,
located on the
driver side of the
instrument panel
near the exterior
lamp control, to
turn the cargo
lamps on and off.
The dome lamps must be on for the cargo lamps
to come on. See Dome Lamp on page 174.
Interior Lamps
The thumbwheel for the interior lamps is located
next to the exterior lamps control. See Exterior
Lamps on page 170 for additional information
on location.
174
thumbwheel up or down to brighten or dim the
instrument panel lights and the radio display.
The instrument panel lights, cluster, and radio
display do not dim to complete darkness.
The instrument panel light brightness control
will only work if the headlamps or parking lamps
are on. See Exterior Lamps on page 170.
Dome Lamp
The dome lamp will come on when a door is
opened. They will shut off several seconds after
all doors are closed.
You can also turn the dome lamp on manually
by turning the interior lamps thumbwheel all
the way up. In this position, the dome lamp will
remain on whether a door is opened or closed.
See Interior Lamps on page 174 for additional
information on location.
Dome Lamp Override
E (Dome Override): Press this button, located
below the exterior lamp control, to turn the
dome lamp off even when a door is opened.
See Exterior Lamps on page 170 for more
information on location.
To return the lamp to automatic operation,
press the button again.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come
on when you remove the key from the ignition.
The lamps will not come on if the dome override
button is pressed in.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)
that estimates the battery’s temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best
performance and extended life of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the
voltage is raised slightly to quickly put the charge
back in. When the state of charge is high, the
voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.
If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage, you may
see the voltage move up or down. This is normal.
If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator (alternator) may not
be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the
power that is needed for very high electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate
control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine
cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged
into accessory power outlets.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome lamp if it is left
on for more than 20 minutes when the ignition
is in LOCK. This will help prevent your battery
from running down.
175
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Your vehicle may have accessory power outlets.
With accessory power outlets you can plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular
telephone or CB radio.
Your vehicle may have two accessory power
outlets located on the lower part of the instrument
panel below the climate control system and
there may be one located on the rear of the
center console. A small cap must be pulled down
to access an accessory power outlet. When
not using an outlet be sure to cover it with the
protective cap.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always
unplug electrical equipment when not in use
and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the
maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Certain electrical accessories may not be
compatible with the accessory power outlet and
could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.
If you experience a problem, see your dealer for
additional information on accessory power outlets.
176
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to
your vehicle may damage it or keep other
components from working as they should.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not use equipment exceeding
maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to
follow the proper installation instructions included
with the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet
can cause damage not covered by your
warranty. Do not hang any type of accessory
or accessory bracket from the plug because
the power outlets are designed for accessory
power plugs only.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
Your vehicle may have a removable ashtray
and cigarette lighter.
Climate Control System
The ashtray is located in the center console
area. The ashtray can be removed for cleaning.
When the ashtray is removed, this area can
also be used as a cupholder.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other
flammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes
or other smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage your vehicle.
Never put flammable items in the ashtray.
To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let
go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while
it is heating does not let the lighter back
away from the heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating can occur to the
lighter or heating element, or a fuse could
be blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter
in while it is heating.
With this system you can control the heating,
cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle.
177
Temperature Knob
The left knob on the control panel is used to
adjust the temperature of the air in the vehicle.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the temperature.
Fan Knob
9 (Fan): The center knob on the control panel
is used to control the fan speed. Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the fan speed.
If the knob is set on “0” (zero), some outside air
will still enter the vehicle and will be directed
according to the position of the mode knob.
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel is used to
direct the airflow inside your vehicle. Turn the
knob to select one of the following modes:
H (Vent): Select this mode to direct air to
the instrument panel outlets.
178
\ (Bi-Level): Select this mode to direct
approximately half of the air to the instrument
panel outlets, and the remaining air to the
floor outlets and the defroster and side window
outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets
and warmer air to the floor outlets.
[ (Floor): Select this mode to direct air to the
floor outlets. Recirculation is disabled in this mode
because interior window could fog under some
conditions. If this occurs, see “Defogging and
Defrosting” following.
Mode Buttons
@ (Recirculation): This mode recirculates air
inside the cabin, and prevents outside air from
coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside odors from entering your vehicle and
cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. Press
this button to turn the recirculation mode on or
off. An indicator light on the button will come on to
let you know the recirculation mode is activated.
Recirculation is only available in the bi-level and
vent modes. It should only be used while in bi-level
and vent modes. Recirculation is not available,
and the light will not come on or flash while in heat,
floor, floor/defog, or defrost modes.
The air conditioning system removes moisture
from the air, so you may sometimes notice a
small amount of water dripping underneath
your vehicle while idling or after turning off the
engine. This is normal.
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn
Defogging and Defrosting
the air conditioning system on or off. An indicator
light on the button will come on to let you know
the air conditioning is activated. When the system
is on, this setting cools and dehumidifies the
air entering your vehicle.
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool
window glass. This can be minimized if the
climate control system is used properly. There
are two modes to clear fog or frost from your
windshield and side windows. Use the defog
mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and
warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode to
remove fog or frost from the windshield more
quickly. For best results, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield before defrosting.
The air conditioning will not function if the fan is
turned off.
You may notice a slight change in engine
performance when the air conditioning compressor
shuts off and turns on again. This is normal.
The system is designed to make adjustments to
help with fuel economy while still maintaining
the selected temperature.
179
Turn the mode knob on the climate control panel
clockwise to select the defog or defrost modes.
Outlet Adjustment
/ (Floor/Defog): This mode directs the air to the
Use the thumbwheel on the outlets to change the
direction of the air flow.
windshield, the side window outlets, and to the floor
outlets. When you select this mode, the system
runs the air conditioning compressor unless the
outside temperature is near freezing or below.
Recirculation is not available in this mode.
Lift up or push down on the thumbwheel located
in the center of the outlet to direct the air up
or down, or slide the thumbwheel to the left or
right to direct the airflow from side-to-side.
0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the
air to the windshield, and the side window outlets.
When you select this mode, the system runs
the air conditioning compressor unless the
outside temperature is near, or below freezing.
Recirculation is not available in this mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows
are clear.
180
air inlets at the base of the windshield that
may block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of your
vehicle more effectively.
Warning Lights, Gages,
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and
gages on your vehicle. The pictures help to
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that
something is wrong before it becomes serious
enough to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to the warning
lights and gages could also save you or others
from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or
is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.
As the details show on the next few pages,
some warning lights come on briefly when you
start the engine just to let you know they are
working. If you are familiar with this section, you
should not be alarmed when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Often gages and warning lights work together
to let you know when there is a problem with
your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and
stays on as you are driving, or when one of
the gages shows there may be a problem, check
the section that tells you what to do about it.
Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to
do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
So please get to know your vehicle’s warning
lights and gages. They can be a big help.
Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information
Center (DIC) that works along with the warning
lights and gages. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 198 for more information.
181
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running.
You will know how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things
you will need to know to drive safely and economically.
United States automatic transmission version shown, Canada similar
182
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in
both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers
per hour (km/h).
Your vehicle has a trip odometer that can tell
you how far your vehicle has been driven since
you last set the trip odometer to zero.
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle
has been driven, in either miles (used in the
United States) or kilometers (used in Canada).
See “Trip Odometer” under DIC Controls and
Displays on page 198 for more information.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip information
stem. See “Odometer” under DIC Controls
and Displays on page 198 for more information.
Tachometer
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle
needs a new odometer installed. If the new one
can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer,
then it must be. But if it cannot, then it is set at
zero, and a label must be put on the driver’s door
to show the old mileage reading when the new
odometer was installed.
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your
vehicle could be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
in the shaded warning area.
The tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
183
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime
will be provided for several seconds to remind
people to buckle their safety belts. The driver
safety belt light will also be provided and stay
on for several seconds, then it will flash for
several more. You should buckle your seat belt.
This chime and light
will be repeated if
the driver remains
unbuckled and the
vehicle is in motion.
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will be provided.
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
Several seconds after the key is turned to ON or
START, a chime will sound for several seconds
to remind the front passenger to buckle their
safety belt. This would only occur if the passenger
airbag is enabled. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 88 for more information. The
passenger safety belt light will also come on and
stay on for several seconds, then it will flash
for several more.
This chime and light
are repeated if the
passenger remains
unbuckled and
the vehicle is
in motion.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled,
neither the chime nor the light will come on.
184
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the
instrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system
for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is
an electrical problem. The system check includes
the airbag sensors, the airbag modules, the
wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic
module. For more information on the airbag
systems, see Airbag System on page 77.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after
you start your vehicle, it means the airbag
system may not be working properly. The
airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in
a crash, or they could even inflate without
a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself
or others, have your vehicle serviced
right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a
few seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON.
If the light does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
185
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag
status indicator.
There is a label on your sun visor that says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.”
This is because the risk to the rear-facing child
is so great if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
When the ignition key is turned to ON or START,
the passenger airbag status indicator will light
ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on
or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
186
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag if the
system detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in
the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, never
put a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front passenger seat unless the passenger airbag
status indicator shows off and the airbag is off.
Here is why:
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the
passenger’s frontal airbag if the system
detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be transported
in vehicles with a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
whenever possible.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator, it means that
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled
(may inflate).
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you
have a rear-facing child restraint installed
in the right front passenger’s seat, it
means that the passenger sensing system
has not turned off the passenger’s frontal
airbag. A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or
killed if the right front passenger’s airbag
inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very
close to the inflating airbag. Do not use
a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front passenger’s seat if the airbag is
turned on.
187
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the
airbag status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has turned off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 88 for more on this,
including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights or the passenger
sensing system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag
readiness light ever come on together,
it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. If this ever
happens, have the vehicle serviced
promptly, because an adult-size person
sitting in the right front passenger seat
may not have the protection of the frontal
airbag. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 185.
188
Battery Warning Light
This light will come
on briefly when you
start the vehicle,
as a check to show
you it is working;
then it should go out.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving,
you may have a problem with the electrical
charging system. Have it checked right away.
Driving while this light is on could drain your
battery and result in a vehicle that may stall.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 202
for more information.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on,
be certain to turn off all your accessories, such
as the radio and climate control system.
Up-Shift Light
(Manual Transmission)
This light appears
when you need to
shift to the next higher
gear on a manual
transmission vehicle.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided
into two parts. If one part is not working, the
other part can still work and stop you. For good
braking, though, you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a
brake problem. Have your brake system inspected
right away.
Shifting when the indicator light is on will help you
get the best fuel economy. See “Up-Shift Light”
under Manual Transmission Operation on
page 126 for more information.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if
there is a problem.
189
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will also come on when you set your parking
brake. See Parking Brake on page 133 for more
information. The light will stay on if your parking
brake does not release fully. If it stays on after your
parking brake is fully released, it means you have a
brake problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the
pedal is harder to push, or the pedal may go closer
to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light
is still on, have the vehicle towed for service.
See Towing Your Vehicle on page 299.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to an accident.
If the light is still on after you have pulled
off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
190
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
With the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), this light
will come on briefly when
you start your engine
to show it is working.
Then it will turn off.
This is normal.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you are
driving, your vehicle needs service. If the regular
brake system warning light is not on, you still
have brakes, but you do not have anti-lock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning light is also
on, you do not have anti-lock brakes and there is
a problem with your regular brakes. See Brake
System Warning Light on page 189.
The ABS warning light should come on briefly
when you turn the ignition key to ON. If the light
does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Tire Pressure Light
This gage shows the
engine coolant
temperature.
This light should come
on briefly when you turn
the ignition to ON.
If the gage pointer is near the top of the gage,
the engine is too hot. It means that your engine
coolant has overheated. If you have been
operating your vehicle under normal driving
conditions, you should pull off the road, stop
your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon
as possible.
This light will also come on when one or more
of your tires are significantly underinflated.
A LOW TIRE message will also appear in the
Driver Information Center (DIC), see DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 202 for more information.
See Engine Overheating on page 348 for
more information.
Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to do
so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.
See Tires on page 377 for more information.
This light will flash for 60 seconds and then turn on
solid if a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure
Monitor system. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 385 for more information.
191
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle has
a computer which
monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition,
and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended
to assure that emissions are at acceptable
levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce
a cleaner environment. The check engine light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
service is required. Malfunctions often will be
indicated by the system before any problem is
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
192
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after awhile, the emission controls
might not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel
economy might not be as good, and the engine
might not run as smoothly. This could lead
to costly repairs that might not be covered
by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of your vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than those of the same
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect
your vehicle’s emission controls and can cause
this light to come on. Modifications to these
systems could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. This could also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 324.
This light should come on, as a check to show you
it is working, when the ignition is on and the engine
is not running. If the light does not come on, have
it repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system
on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may
be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may
be required.
If the Light is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the
amount of cargo being hauled as soon
as it is possible
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to
do so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park
your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least
10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light
remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”
following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and see your dealer for service
as soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 328.
The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving
trips with the cap properly installed should turn
the light off.
193
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The
condition will usually be corrected when the
electrical system dries out. A few driving trips
should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See Gasoline Octane on page 326. Poor fuel
quality will cause your engine not to run as
efficiently as designed. You may notice this as
stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration.
(These conditions may go away once the engine
is warmed up.) This will be detected by the
system and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the
light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light
turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.
Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
194
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or may begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if
the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system.
The vehicle would be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if you have recently
replaced your battery or if your battery has
run down. The diagnostic system is designed
to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several
days of routine driving. If you have done this and
your vehicle still does not pass the inspection
for lack of OBD system readiness, your dealer
can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Light
The light will come on
when you turn your
key to ON or START.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is
low. If you do, your engine can become so
hot that it catches fire. You or others could
be burned. Check your oil as soon as
possible and have your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
It goes off once you start your engine. That is
a check to be sure the light works. If it does not
come on, be sure to have it fixed so it will be
there to warn you if something goes wrong.
When the light comes on and stays on, it means
that oil is not flowing through the engine properly.
The vehicle could be low on oil and it might
have some other system problem. See Engine
Oil on page 333 and “OIL” under DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 202 for more information.
195
Security Light
Cruise Control Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn
the key to START.
The light will stay on
until the engine starts.
If the ignition is turned on, and the light flashes,
the Passlock® system has entered a tamper
mode. If the vehicle fails to start, see Passlock®
on page 117.
If the light comes on continuously while driving
and stays on, there may be a problem with
the Passlock® system. Your vehicle will not be
protected by Passlock®, and you should see
your dealer.
This light comes on
whenever you set the
cruise control.
The light goes out when the cruise control is
turned off. See Cruise Control on page 166 for
more information.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
Also, see Content Theft-Deterrent on page 115
for additional information regarding the security
light.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 165 for more information.
196
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Indicator Light
This light turns
on whenever the
Daytime Running
Lamps are on.
See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 171
for more information.
Fuel Gage
When the ignition
is on, the fuel gage
tells you about
how much fuel you
have remaining in
the fuel tank.
Here are four things that some owners ask
about. None of these indicate a problem with
your fuel gage:
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than
the gage indicated. For example, the gage
may have indicated the tank was half full,
but it actually took a little more or less than
half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a
corner or speed up.
• The gage does not go back to empty when
you turn off the ignition.
When the fuel in the fuel tank is low, you will see
a LOW FUEL message on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 202 for more information.
197
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Trip Information
The Driver Information Center (DIC) displays
information such as the trip odometer,
personalization features, and warning messages.
The DIC display is located on the instrument
panel cluster.
Odometer
DIC Controls and Displays
The Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on
when the ignition is on.
If a problem is detected, a warning message
appears on the display. Pressing and releasing
the trip odometer reset stem on the DIC
acknowledges some current warnings or service
messages. Some messages only clear after
the required action has been taken.
The DIC has different modes which can be
accessed by pressing the trip odometer reset stem
on the DIC. These modes are explained in the
following section. The DIC trip odometer reset stem
is located on the instrument panel cluster next to
the DIC display. To scroll through the available
functions, press and release the reset stem.
198
The odometer is automatically displayed on the
DIC when you start the vehicle. The odometer
shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven in either miles for the United States
or kilometers for Canada.
Trip Odometer
Press and release the reset stem until TRIP
appears on the DIC display. The trip odometer
shows the current distance traveled since the last
reset of the trip odometer in either miles for the
United States or kilometers for Canada.
To reset the trip odometer, press and hold the
reset stem until the display returns to zero.
Engine Oil Life System
Language
With the engine off, turn the key to ON and then
press the reset stem until OIL LIFE RESET
appears — alternating between OIL LIFE and
RESET — on the DIC display. The CHANGE OIL
message alerts you to change your oil on a
schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
Always reset the OIL LIFE message after an
oil change. To reset the message, see Engine
Oil Life System on page 336.
This feature allows you to choose the language
in which the DIC display shows information.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring
the oil life, additional maintenance is recommended
in the Maintenance Schedule in this manual.
See Engine Oil on page 333 and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 442 for more information.
To set your choice for this feature, perform the
following steps:
1. With the engine off, turn the key to ON,
but do not start the engine.
2. Close all doors so the DOORS message
does not display in the DIC.
3. Momentarily press and release the reset
stem until the current language is displayed:
English (default), Spanish, or French.
4. To select a different language, press and
hold the reset stem until the next language
appears.
5. Repeat Step 4 until the desired language is
displayed. Once the desired language is
shown on the DIC display, the language is set.
6. To exit the language selection, momentarily
press and release the reset stem. All DIC
messages will now display in the language
selected.
199
Automatic Door Locks
This feature allows you to program your door
locks to a preferred setting.
To set your choice for this feature, perform the
following steps:
1. With the engine off, turn the key to LOCK.
Do not remove the key from the ignition.
2. Press and hold the power door lock button
until the DIC display shows the current
door lock mode.
3. To view the next available mode, press and
hold the reset stem until the mode appears.
Release the reset stem and press and
hold again to view the next mode.
4. Once the desired mode is shown on the DIC
display, briefly press the reset stem to set
your choice. The DIC display then clears.
The following are the available modes:
Lock 1 (default): On vehicles with an automatic
transmission, this mode locks all of the doors
when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P) and
unlocks all of the doors when the vehicle is shifted
into PARK (P).
200
On vehicles with a manual transmission, this
mode locks all of the doors when the vehicle
speed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) and
unlocks all of the doors when the key is removed
from the ignition.
Lock 2: On vehicles with an automatic
transmission, this mode locks all of the doors
when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P) and
unlocks the driver’s door when the vehicle is
shifted into PARK (P).
On vehicles with a manual transmission, this
mode locks all of the doors when the vehicle
speed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) and
unlocks the driver’s door when the key is removed
from the ignition.
Lock 3: On vehicles with an automatic
transmission, this mode locks all of the doors
when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
The doors will not automatically unlock.
On vehicles with a manual transmission, this
mode locks all of the doors when the vehicle
speed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h).
The doors will not automatically unlock.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Feedback
This feature allows you to program your
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) feedback to
a preferred setting.
To set your choice for this feature, perform
the following steps:
1. With the engine off, turn the key to LOCK.
Do not remove the key from the ignition.
2. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons
on the RKE transmitter at the same time.
Hold both buttons until the DIC display
shows the current RKE feedback mode.
3. To view the next available mode, press and
hold the reset stem until the mode appears.
Release the reset stem and press and
hold again to view the next mode.
The following are the available modes:
RFA 1 (default): This mode flashes the parking
lamps when you press the lock or unlock
buttons on the RKE transmitter.
RFA 2: This mode flashes the parking lamps and
sounds the horn when you press the lock button
on the RKE transmitter. This mode also flashes the
parking lamps when you press the unlock button
on the RKE transmitter.
RFA 3: This mode flashes the parking lamps
and sounds the horn when you press the lock or
unlock buttons on the RKE transmitter.
RFA 4: This mode disables RKE feedback.
There will be no feedback when you press the
lock or unlock buttons on the RKE transmitter.
4. Once the desired mode is shown on the DIC
display, briefly press the reset stem to set
your choice. The DIC display then clears.
201
DIC Warnings and Messages
AC (Air Conditioning) OFF
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the
driver that the status of the vehicle has changed
and that some action may be needed by the driver
to correct the condition. Multiple messages may
appear one after another. The messages are
displayed for several seconds each.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too high and the air conditioning
in your vehicle needs to be turned off. See Engine
Overheating on page 348 and Climate Control
System on page 177 for more information.
This message displays along with the ENG HOT
message.
Some messages may not require immediate
action, but you should press and release the
trip odometer reset stem to acknowledge that you
received the messages and to clear them from
the display. Each message must be acknowledged
individually.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the
DIC display because they are more urgent.
These messages require action before they
can be cleared. You should take any messages
that appear on the display seriously and remember
that clearing the messages only makes the
messages disappear, not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that can
be displayed and some information about them.
202
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) FAULT
This message displays if there is a problem
with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Check
the ABS as soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer. See Brakes on
page 357 and Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light on page 190 for more information. Press
and release the reset stem to acknowledge
the message and clear it from the display.
BRAKES
This message displays if there is a problem with
the brakes. Check the brakes as soon as possible
and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer.
See Brakes on page 357 and Brake System
Warning Light on page 189 for more information.
Press and release the reset stem to acknowledge
the message and clear it from the display.
CHANGE OIL
This message displays when the oil needs to be
changed. Check the oil in your vehicle as soon
as possible and have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer. See Engine Oil on page 333
and Scheduled Maintenance on page 442 for
more information. Press and release the reset
stem to acknowledge the message and clear
it from the display.
DOORS
This message displays when one or more of
the doors is ajar. Check all the doors on your
vehicle to make sure they are closed. The
message clears from the display after all of
the doors are closed.
ENG (Engine) HOT
This message displays when the engine
coolant temperature is hot. Check the
engine coolant temperature gage.
See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on
page 191. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer as soon as possible if you suspect
the engine is overheating. See Engine
Overheating on page 348 for more information.
FLUID
This message displays if the brake fluid is low.
Check the brake fluid as soon as possible
and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer.
See Brakes on page 357 for more information.
Press and release the reset stem to acknowledge
the message and clear it from the display.
FUEL CAP
This message displays if the vehicle’s fuel cap is
either off or loose. Pull over as soon as possible
and check to see if the fuel cap is secure. You may
also see the check engine light on the instrument
panel cluster. If the check engine light does
come on when the fuel cap was loose, it may
take a few driving trips before the light turns off.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 192
for more information if the light still remains on.
Press and release the reset stem to acknowledge
the message and clear it from the display.
203
LOW FUEL
OIL
This message displays if the level of fuel in
the vehicle is low. Also check the fuel gage.
See Fuel Gage on page 197 for more information.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.
This message displays when the oil pressure is
low. See Oil Pressure Light on page 195 and
Engine Oil on page 333 for more information.
LOW TIRE
This message displays if a low tire pressure is
detected in any of the vehicle’s tires. Press and
release the reset stem to acknowledge the message
and clear it from the display. The message appears
at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the
correct inflation pressure. See Tires on page 377
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 384 for more
information on tires and the correct inflation
pressures.
LOW TRAC (Traction)
If your vehicle has the Traction Control
System (TCS), this message displays when a
low traction condition is detected. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 253 for more
information. Press and release the reset stem
to acknowledge the message and clear it from
the display.
204
PARK BRK (Brake)
This message displays when the parking brake
is set. See Parking Brake on page 133 and
Brake System Warning Light on page 189 for
more information. The message clears from the
display after the parking brake is released or
by pressing and releasing the reset stem.
REDUCED POWER
This message displays when the vehicle’s
engine power is reduced. Reduced engine power
can affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate.
If this message is on, but there is no reduction
in performance, proceed to your destination.
The performance may be reduced the next time
the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven
at a reduced speed while this message is on,
but acceleration and speed may be reduced.
Anytime this message stays on, the vehicle
should be taken to your dealer for service as
soon as possible. Press and release the reset
stem to acknowledge the message and clear
it from the display.
SERV (Service) 4WD
(Four-Wheel Drive)
This message displays when there is a problem
with the transfer case control system. Check the
transfer case on your vehicle and have it serviced
by your dealer. See Four-Wheel Drive on page 129
for more information about the transfer case. Press
and release the reset stem to acknowledge the
message and clear it from the display.
SERV (Service) TPM
(Tire Pressure Monitor)
This message displays if any of the tire monitor
sensors have malfunctioned, if the tire monitor
sensors have not been programmed, or if
the recommended tire pressures are not
programmed. The tire pressure light also flashes
for one minute and then turns on solid until
the condition goes away or the system is serviced.
See Tire Pressure Light on page 191. Press and
release the reset stem to acknowledge the
message and clear it from the display. This
message appears at each ignition cycle until the
system is serviced. See your dealer for service.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 385 for
more information.
SERV (Service) VEH (Vehicle)
This message displays if your vehicle needs
service. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer as soon as possible.
SERVICE CHARG (Charge)
SYS (System)
This message displays if there is a problem with
the battery charging system. Under certain
conditions, the battery warning light may also turn
on in the instrument panel cluster. See Battery
Warning Light on page 188. The battery will not be
charging at an optimal rate and the vehicle will
lose the ability to enter the fuel economy mode.
The vehicle is safe to drive, however have
the electrical system checked by your dealer.
Press and release the reset stem to acknowledge
the message and clear it from the display.
205
TRACTION FAULT
Audio System(s)
If your vehicle has the Traction Control System
(TCS), this message may display if there is
a problem with the TCS. Check the TCS as soon
as possible and have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 253 for more information. Press and
release the reset stem to acknowledge the
message and clear it from the display.
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
read the pages following to familiarize yourself
with its features.
TURN SIGNAL
This message displays when the turn signal is
on for about 0.75 miles (1.2 km) of travel. Press
and release the reset stem to acknowledge
the message and clear it from the display.
206
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a
safer driving experience. See Defensive Driving
on page 246. By taking a few moments to read
this manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s
audio system, you can use it with less effort,
as well as take advantage of its features.
While your vehicle is parked, set up your audio
system by presetting your favorite radio stations,
setting the tone and adjusting the speakers.
Then, when driving conditions permit, you can
tune to your favorite stations using the presets and
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash
and you or others can be injured or killed.
Always keep your eyes on the road and
your mind on the drive — avoid engaging
in extended searching while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
safe driving. Here are some ways in which you
can help avoid distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment
to your vehicle, such as an audio system,
CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,
or two-way radio, make sure that it can be
added by checking with your dealer/retailer.
Also, check federal rules covering mobile radio
and telephone units. If sound equipment can
be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with
the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio,
or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with
the operation of sound equipment that
has been added.
Notice: The chime signals related to safety
belts, parking brake, and other functions
of your vehicle operate through the radio/
entertainment system. If that equipment
is replaced or additional equipment is added
to your vehicle, the chimes may not work.
Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle
before installing it. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 324.
207
Setting the Time
Radios without Radio Data
Systems (RDS)
Press and hold the hour button until the
correct hour displays. Press and hold the
minute button until the correct minute displays.
The time can be set with the ignition on or off.
Press and hold HR (hour) until the correct
hour displays. Press and hold MIN (minute)
until the correct minute displays. There is an
initial two-second delay before the clock goes
into time-set mode. Display the time with the
ignition off, by pressing RCL (recall), HR,
or MIN.
To synchronize the time with an FM station
broadcasting Radio Data System (RDS)
information, press and hold the hour and minute
buttons at the same time until RDS TIME displays.
To accept this time, press and hold the hour
and minute buttons, at the same time, for another
two seconds. If the time is not available from
the station, NO UPDAT (update) displays.
Radios with Radio Data
Systems (RDS)
The radio could have a button marked
with an H or HR to represent hours and
an M or MN to represent minutes.
208
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After
tuning to an RDS broadcast station, it could take
a few minutes for the time to update.
AM-FM Radio
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, or AM. The selection displays.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
o SEEK p: Press the SEEK arrows to go to the
previous or to the next station and stay there.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or to decrease the
volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the
display between the radio station frequency, band,
and the time. When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for two seconds until a beep sounds. The
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press either
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either
SEEK arrow for more than four seconds until
two beeps sound. The radio goes to the first preset
station stored on the pushbuttons, plays for a
few seconds, then goes to the next preset station.
Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning
presets.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with
a strong signal that are in the selected band.
209
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM)
can be programmed on the six numbered
pushbuttons, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
AUDIO: To adjust bass or treble, press and
release AUDIO until BAS (bass) or TRE (treble)
displays. Then press and hold the wxarrows to
increase or to decrease the tone. If a station is
weak or has static, decrease the treble.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When
that numbered pushbutton is pressed,
the station that was set, returns.
5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each
pushbutton.
210
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position,
select BAS (bass) or TRE (treble). Then press and
hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until a
beep sounds. B (balance) and a zero or T (treble)
and a zero displays.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker
controls to the middle position, first exit out
of audio mode by pressing another button,
causing the radio to perform that function or
wait five seconds for the display to return to
time of day. Then press and hold AUDIO for
more than two seconds until a beep sounds.
CEN (center) displays.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Then press and hold AUDIO for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds. CEN (center)
displays.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the
right and the left speakers, press and release
AUDIO until BAL (balance) displays. Then press
and hold the wxarrows to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
Radio Messages
To adjust the fade between the front and the
rear speakers, press and release AUDIO until
FAD (fade) displays. Then press and hold
the wxarrows to move the sound toward the
front or the rear speakers.
CAL (Calibrated): The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.
If CAL displays it means that the radio has not
been configured properly for your vehicle and must
be returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
select BAL or FAD. Then press and hold
AUDIO for more than two seconds until a beep
sounds. B (balance) and a zero or F (fade) and
a zero displays.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker
controls to the middle position, first exit out
of audio mode by pressing another button,
causing the radio to perform that function or wait
five seconds for the display to return to time of day.
Fade might not be available if the vehicle is a
regular cab model.
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed
when the THEFTLOCK® system has locked up.
Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error
cannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
211
Radio with CD (MP3)
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected
type of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local
and national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works
when the information is available. In rare cases,
a radio station could broadcast incorrect
information that causes the radio features to
work improperly. If this happens, contact the
radio station.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System
(RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
212
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the
station name or call letters display instead of the
frequency. RDS stations can also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program
being broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.
XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk,
traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song
title and artist name. A service fee is required
in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)
or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
DISPL (Display): When the ignition is turned off,
press this knob to display the time.
For RDS, press the DISPL knob to change what
displays while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency,
PTY (program type), and the name of the
program (if available).
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISPL knob
while in XM™ mode to retrieve four different
categories of information related to the current
song or channel: Artist, Song Title, Category
or PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the
DISPL knob until you see the desired display,
then press and hold this knob for two seconds.
The radio produces one beep. The selected
display is now the default.
o VOL p (Volume): Turn this knob to increase
or to decrease the volume.
213
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Automatic
volume automatically adjusts the audio system to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press
this button to select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH.
AVOL displays. Each higher setting allows
for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then as you drive, automatic volume
increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome
noise at any speed. The volume level should
always sound the same to you as you drive.
NONE displays if the radio cannot determine the
vehicle speed. To turn automatic volume off,
press this button until OFF displays.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between
FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
The selection displays.
o TUNE p: Turn this knob to select radio
stations.
214
q SEEK r: Press the SEEK arrows to go to the
previous or to the next station and stay there.
The radio only seeks stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
q SCAN r: Press and hold either SCAN arrow
for more than two seconds. SCAN displays and
the radio produces one beep. The radio goes to
a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press either SCAN arrow again or
one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than four seconds.
PSCN displays and the radio produces one beep.
The radio goes to a preset station, plays for a
few seconds, then goes to the next preset station.
Press either SCAN arrow again or one of the
pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
The radio only scans stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob
until BASS or TREB displays. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The tone display shows
the bass or the treble level. If a station is weak
or has static, decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM,
or XM1 or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When
that numbered pushbutton is pressed,
the station that was set, returns and the
equalization that was selected, is stored
for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob.
A beep sounds.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, push and hold the AUDIO knob
when no tone or speaker control displays.
ALL CENTERED displays and a beep sounds.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this
button to select customized equalization settings
designed for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock,
and classical.
To return the bass and treble to the manual
mode, push and release the AUTO EQ button
until CUSTOM displays.
215
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the
right and the left speakers, push and release
the AUDIO knob until BAL (balance) displays.
Turn the knob to move the sound toward the
right or the left speakers.
Finding a Program Type (PTY)
Station (RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the
following:
1. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program
type select mode. TYPE and a PTY displays.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob
until FADE displays. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob again, to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY displays, press the
SEEK TYPE button to select and to take
you to the PTY’s first station.
To adjust the balance or the fade to the middle
position, push the AUDIO knob to select BAL
or FADE, then push it again and hold it until
one beep sounds.
4. To go to another station within that PTY,
press the SEEK TYPE button twice to
display the PTY and then go to another
station.
5. Press P-TYPE knob to exit program type
select mode.
IF PTY disappears on the display, go back
to Step 1.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, push and hold the AUDIO knob
when no tone or speaker control is displayed.
ALL CENTERED displays and a beep sounds.
If both PTY and TRAF (traffic) are on, the radio
searches for stations with the selected PTY
and traffic announcements.
216
If the radio cannot find the desired program type,
NONE displays and the radio returns to the
last tuned station.
ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported
by all RDS stations.
BAND (AF– Alternate Frequency): Alternate
frequency lets the radio switch to a stronger station
with the same program type. To turn alternate
frequency on, press and hold BAND for two
seconds. AF ON displays. The radio could switch
to stations with a stronger frequency.
INFO (Information): If the current station has
a message, the information symbol displays.
Press this button to see the message. The
message can display the artist, song title,
call in phone numbers, etc.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold
BAND again for two seconds. AF OFF displays.
The radio does not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national
emergencies. When an alert announcement
comes on the current radio station, ALERT!
displays. You will hear the announcement,
even if the volume is low or a CD is playing.
If a CD is playing, play stops during the
announcement. Alert announcements cannot
be turned off.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of
the message displays every three seconds.
To scroll through the message, press and release
the INFO button. A new group of words display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has displayed, the information symbol
disappears from the display until another new
message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. The last
message stays on the display until a new message
is received or the radio is tuned to a different
station.
When a message is not available from a station,
NO INFO displays.
217
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF displays, the tuned
station broadcasts traffic announcements.
When a traffic announcement is broadcast on
this station you will hear it.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system
has been calibrated for your vehicle from the
factory. If CAL ERR displays it means that
the radio has not been configured properly for
your vehicle and it must be returned to your
dealer/retailer for service.
If the station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press the TRAF button and
the radio seeks to a station that does. When a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements
is found, the radio stops seeking and TRAF
displays. If no station is found that broadcasts
traffic announcements, NO TRAF displays.
LOCKED: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take
your vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
If TRAF displays, press the TRAF button to
turn off the traffic announcements.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error
cannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
The radio plays the traffic announcement if the
volume is low. The radio interrupts the play
of a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts
traffic announcements.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.
218
See XM Radio Messages on page 240 later in
this section for further detail.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in, and READING displays.
The CD should begin playing. If you want to
insert a CD with the ignition off, first press
the Z(eject) button or the DISPL knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in
the player it stays in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD starts to play
where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.
As each new track starts to play, the track
number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has
been recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of
the CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly.
If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of
Your CDs on page 243 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get
caught in the CD player. If a CD is recorded
on a personal computer and a description label
is needed, try labeling the top of the recorded
CD with a marking pen.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more
than one CD is inserted into the slot at a
time, or an attempt is made to play scratched
or damaged CDs, the CD player could be
damaged. While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later
in this section.
1 FLD x (Previous): This button is inactive
when playing a CD.
2 FLD w (Next): This button is inactive when
playing a CD.
219
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton
to reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold
this pushbutton for less than two seconds to
reverse at 10 times the normal playing speed.
Press and hold it for more than two seconds
to reverse at 20 times the normal playing speed.
Release this pushbutton to play the passage.
ET (elapsed time) and the elapsed time of
the track displays.
q SEEK r: Press the left SEEK arrow to go
to the start of the current or the previous
track. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the next track. Pressing either SEEK
arrow for more than two seconds scans the next
tracks, playing the first eight seconds of each
track until all of the tracks have been previewed.
Press this button again to stop scanning and
to play the track.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. Press and
hold this pushbutton for less than two seconds to
advance at six times the normal playing speed.
Press and hold it for more than two seconds
to advance at 17 times the normal playing speed.
Release this pushbutton to play the passage.
ET and the elapsed time of the track displays.
o TUNE p: Turning this knob fast tracks
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to
hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential,
order. RDM ON displays. RDM and the track
number displays when each track starts to play.
Press RDM again to turn off random play.
RDM OFF displays.
220
reverse or advances through tracks. The track
number displays for each track.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. ET and the
elapsed time of the track displays. To change the
default on the display (track or elapsed time),
press this knob until you see the desired display,
then press and hold the knob for two seconds.
The radio produces one beep. The selected display
is now the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The inactive CD remains
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a
CD when listening to the radio. The CD symbol
displays when a CD is loaded.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,
•
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD.
Eject can be activated with either the ignition
or radio off. CDs can be loaded with the ignition
and radio off if this button is pressed first.
•
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R Disc
•
Your vehicle’s radio system may have the
MP3/WMA feature. If it has this feature, it is
capable of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R disc.
For more information on how to play an
MP3/WMA CD-R disc, see Using an MP3
on page 234 later in this section.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or
the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns
to normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
•
or upside down.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about
an hour and try again.
The format of the CD might not be compatible.
See Using an MP3 on page 234 later in
this section.
There could have been a problem while
burning the CD.
The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the
radio displays an error message, write it down and
provide it to your dealer/retailer when reporting
the problem.
221
Radio with Six-Disc CD
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected
type of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local
and national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works
when the information is available. In rare cases,
a radio station can broadcast incorrect information
that causes the radio features to work improperly.
If this happens, contact the radio station.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM
stations that broadcast RDS information.
222
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the
station name or call letters display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations can also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program
being broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.
XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk,
traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song
title and artist name. A service fee is required
in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)
or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the
system on and off.
o VOLUME p: Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or to decrease
the volume.
INFO (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio
Service and RDS Features): When the ignition
is off, press this knob to display the time.
Press the INFO button to display additional text
information related to the current FM-RDS or XM™
station. A choice of additional information such
as: Channel, Song, Artist, and PTY (program type)
may appear. Continue pressing the information
button to highlight the desired label, and the
information about that label displays.
When information is not available, No Info
displays.
To change the default on the display, press the
INFO knob until you see the desired display, then
press and hold the knob until a beep sounds.
The selected display becomes the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically
to make up for road and wind noise as you
drive by increasing the volume as vehicle speed
increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this
button to select MIN (minimum), MED (medium),
or MAX. AUTO VOL (maximum automatic volume)
displays. Each higher setting provides more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
To turn automatic volume off, press this button
until AUTO VOL OFF displays.
223
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between
FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
The selection displays.
o TUNE p: Turn this knob to select
radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or TYPE
arrows to go to the previous or to the next station
and stay there.
The radio only seeks stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or
TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCN displays
and a beep sounds. The radio goes to a station,
plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
station. Press either the SCAN or TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either the
SCAN or TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.
PSC displays and a double beep sounds.
224
The radio goes to a preset station, plays for a
few seconds, then goes to the next preset station.
Press either the SCAN or TYPE arrows again to
stop scanning presets.
The radio only scans stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM,
or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When
that numbered pushbutton is pressed,
the station that was set, returns for that
pushbutton.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
1. Tune to the preset station.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to
select the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer displays,
the equalization is set for that preset station.
3. To resave the preset, press and hold
the preset button until a beep sounds.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until
BASS, MID, or TREB displays. Turn the knob
to increase or to decrease. The display shows the
bass, midrange, or treble level. If a station is
weak or has static, decrease the treble.
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to the
middle position, push and hold the AUDIO knob.
The radio produces one beep and adjusts the
display level to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, push and hold the AUDIO knob
when no tone or speaker controls are displayed.
ALL CENTERED displays and a beep sounds.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this
button to select customized equalization settings
designed for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock,
and classical.
To return to the manual mode, press the AUTO
EQ button until CUSTOM displays. Then manually
adjust the bass, midrange, and treble using the
AUDIO knob.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the
right and the left speakers, push and release the
AUDIO knob until BAL displays. Turn the knob
to move the sound toward the right or the
left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until
FAD displays. Turn the knob to move the sound
toward the front or the rear speakers.
225
The fade feature might not be available on all
radio systems.
To adjust the balance or fade to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob while
BAL or FAD is displayed. The radio produces
one beep and adjusts the display level to
the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, push and hold the AUDIO knob
while no tone or speaker controls are displayed.
ALL CENTERED displays and a beep sounds.
Finding a Program Type (PTY)
Station (RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the
following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. P-TYPE and the last
selected PTY displays.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release
the TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press
either the SEEK or TYPE arrows to select
and to take you to the PTY’s first station.
226
4. To cancel the seek, press any of the SEEK
or TYPE arrows. This also exits the program
type seek mode and returns to the last
tuned station.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. P-TYPE and the last
selected PTY displays.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release
the TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press
and hold either the SEEK or TYPE arrows
for two seconds, and the radio begins
scanning the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either the SEEK or TYPE arrows
to stop scanning.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate
frequency allows the radio to switch to a stronger
station with the same program type. To turn
alternate frequency on, press and hold BAND
for two seconds. AF ON displays. The radio can
switch to stations with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold
BAND again for two seconds. AF OFF displays.
The radio does not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite
Radio Service.
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets.
Up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can
be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. P-TYPE and the last
selected PTY displays.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release
the TYPE button to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until a beep sounds. When
that numbered pushbutton is pressed,
the PTY that was set, returns.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO displays. Press this button to
see the message. The message could display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts
of the message appears every three seconds.
To scroll through the message, press and release
the INFO button. A new group of words display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has displayed, INFO disappears from
the display until another new message is received.
The last message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button. You can view the last message
until a new message is received or a different
station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station,
NO INFO displays.
227
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system
has been calibrated for your vehicle from the
factory. If CAL ERR displays, it means that the
radio has not been configured properly for
the vehicle and must be returned to your
dealer/retailer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when
the THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take
the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error
cannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 240 later in
this section for further detail.
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD
in the player, it stays in the player. When
the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD starts
playing where it stopped, if it was the last
selected audio source.
228
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of
the CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly.
If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of
Your CDs on page 243 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded
CD with a marking pen.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more
than one CD is inserted into the slot at a
time, or an attempt is made to play scratched
or damaged CDs, the CD player could be
damaged. While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the
CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the
right of the slot, to turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for
two seconds.
A beep sound and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, begins to flash and
MULTI LOAD # displays.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
INSERT CD # displays, load a CD. Insert
the CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player pulls the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light
begins flashing again. Once the light stops
flashing and turns green, you can load another
CD. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
Do not try to load more than six.
To load more than one CD but less than six,
complete Steps 1 through 3. When finished
loading CDs, press the LOAD button to cancel
the loading function. The radio begins to play
the last CD loaded.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number
for each CD displays.
229
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number displays. To play
a specific CD, first press the CD AUX button
(if not already in CD mode), then press the
numbered pushbutton that corresponds to the CD.
A small bar appears under the CD number that
is playing and the track number displays.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later
in this section.
CD Z (Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press
and release this button.
To eject multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the Z button for five seconds.
A beep sounds and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, begins to flash and
EJECT ALL displays.
2. Once the light stops flashing, REMOVE CD #
displays. The CD ejects and can be removed.
Once the CD is removed, the indicator light
begins flashing again and another CD ejects.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD
or the eject button.
230
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds,
the CD automatically pulls back into the player.
If CD is pushed back into the player, before
the 25 second time period is complete, the
player senses an error and tries to eject the
CD several times before stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to
eject a CD after you have tried to push it in
manually. The player’s 25-second eject timer
resets at each press of eject, causing the player
to not eject the CD until the 25-second time
period has elapsed.
{ REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse quickly within a track. You will hear
sound at a reduced volume. The elapsed time
of the track displays. Release this button to play
the passage.
FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button
to advance quickly within a track. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. The elapsed
time of the track displays. Release this button
to play the passage.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire
CD can be repeated.
To use repeat, do the following:
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press
and release the RPT button. RPT displays.
Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press
and hold the RPT button for two seconds.
RPT displays. Press RPT again to turn
off repeat play.
RDM (Random): With the random setting,
tracks can be listened to in random, rather than
sequential, order, on one CD or on all of the CDs.
To use random, do one of the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening
to in random order, press and release the
RDM button. RANDOM ONE displays. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that
are loaded in random order, press and
hold RDM for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and RANDOM ALL displays.
Press RDM again to turn off random play.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press
AUTO EQ to select the equalization setting
while playing a CD. The equalization is stored
when a CD is played. For more information on
AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously in
this section.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go
to the start of the current track (if more than
10 seconds have played), or to go to the previous
track (if less than 10 seconds have played).
Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next track.
If either arrow is held or pressed more than
once, the player continues moving backward or
forward through the CD.
©SCAN ¨: To scan one CD, press and hold
either SCAN arrow for more than two seconds
until SCAN displays and a beep sounds. The
radio goes to the next track, plays for 10 seconds,
then goes to the next track. Press either SCAN
arrow again, to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than four seconds until
CD SCAN displays and a beep sounds. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track
of each loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrow
again, to stop scanning.
231
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how
long the current track has been playing. To change
the default on the display, track or elapsed time,
press the knob until you see the desired display,
then press and hold the knob until the radio beeps.
The selected display becomes the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
while a CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) remains
inside the radio for future listening.
Using Song List Mode
The six-disc CD changer has a feature called
song list. This feature is capable of saving
20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least
one CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in
this section for more information.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in
song list mode. S-LIST should not display.
If S-LIST is present, press the SONG
LIST button to turn it off.
232
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the
numbered pushbutton and then use the
SEEK or TYPE right arrows to locate the
track to be saved. The track begins to play.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to
save the track into memory. When SONG
LIST is pressed, one beep sounds. After
two seconds of continuously pressing
the SONG LIST button, two beeps sound
to confirm the track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other
selections.
S-LIST FULL displays if you try to save more
than 20 selections.
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST
button. One beep sounds and S-LIST displays.
The recorded tracks begins to play in the
order they were saved.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK
or TYPE arrows. Seeking past the last saved
track returns to the first saved track.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song
list on. S-LIST displays.
3. Press either the SEEK or TYPE arrows to
select the desired track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for
two seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed,
one beep sounds. After two seconds of
continuously pressing the SONG LIST button,
two beeps sound to confirm that the track
has been deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining
tracks are moved up the list. When another track
is added to the song list, the track is added to
the end of the list.
To delete the entire song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song
list on. S-LIST displays.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for
more than four seconds. One beep sounds,
followed by two beeps after two seconds,
and a final beep sounds after four seconds.
S-LIST EMPTY displays indicating the
song list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains
saved tracks from that CD, those tracks are
automatically deleted from the song list. Any
tracks saved to the song list again are added
to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST
button. One beep sounds and S-LIST is
removed from the display.
233
CD Messages
Using an MP3
CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or
the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns
to normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road.
When the road becomes smoother,
the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,
or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about
an hour and try again.
• There could have been a problem while
burning the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
MP3 CD-R Disc
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any
other reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the
radio displays an error message, write it down and
provide it to your dealer/retailer when reporting
the problem.
234
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files
on one disc.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl
extension, other file extensions might not work.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed
or variable bit rates. Song title, artist name,
and album are displayed by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy
to find songs while driving. Organize songs
by albums using one folder for each album.
Each folder or album should contain 18 songs
or less.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an
MP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually
better to burn the disc all at once.
The player is able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.
Long file names, folder names, or playlist names
may use more disc memory space than necessary.
To conserve space on the disc, minimize the length
of the file, folder, or playlist names. You can also
play an MP3 CD-R that was recorded using no file
folders. The system can support up to 11 folders in
depth, though, keep the depth of the folders to a
minimum in order to keep down the complexity
and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder
during playback. If a CD contains more than the
maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,
and 255 files the player lets you access and
navigate up to the maximum, but all items over
the maximum are played.
Root Directory
The root directory is treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
displays as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory are accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are
always accessed before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere
in the file structure that contains only folders/
subfolders and no compressed files directly
beneath them, the player advances to the next
folder in the file structure that contains compressed
audio files. The empty folder does not display.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files,
the files are located under the root folder. The next
and previous folder functions have no function on a
CD that was recorded without folders or playlists.
When displaying the name of the folder the radio
displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and
compressed audio files, but no folders, all files
are located under the root folder. The folder down
and the folder up buttons search playlists (Px)
first and then go to the root folder. When the
radio displays the name of the folder, the radio
displays ROOT.
235
Order of Play
File System and Naming
Tracks are played in the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the
first playlist and continues sequentially
through all tracks in each playlist. When
the last track of the last playlist has played,
play continues from the first track of the
first playlist.
• If the CD does not contain any playlists,
then play begins from the first track under
the root directory. When all tracks from
the root directory have played, play continues
from files according to their numerical
listing. After playing the last track from the
last folder, play begins again at the first track
of the first folder or root directory.
The song name that displays is the song name
that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song
name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the
radio displays the file name without the extension
(such as .mp3) as the track name.
When play enters a new folder, the display
does not automatically show the new folder
name unless you have chosen the folder mode
as the default display. See DISPL (display) later
in this section for more information. The new
track name displays.
236
Track names longer than 32 characters or
four pages are shortened. Parts of words on
the last page of text and the extension of
the filename does not display.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists which were created by
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed, however, they cannot
be edited. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in, and READING displays.
The CD should begin playing and the CD symbol
displays. If you want to insert a CD with the
ignition off, first press the Z button or the
DISPL knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD
in the player it stays in the player. When
the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD starts
to play where it stopped, if it was the last
selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track
number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has
been recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of
the CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly.
If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of
Your CDs on page 243 Care of Your CDs for
more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get
caught in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on
a personal computer and a description label
is needed, try labeling the top of the recorded
CD with a marking pen.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more
than one CD is inserted into the slot at a
time, or an attempt is made to play scratched
or damaged CDs, the CD player could be
damaged. While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
1 FLD x (Previous Folder): Press this button
to go to the first track in the previous folder.
Pressing this button while in folder random mode
takes you to the previous folder and plays the
tracks in random order in that folder.
237
2 FLD w (Next Folder): Press this button to
go to the first track in the next folder. Pressing
this button while in folder random mode takes
the CD to the next folder and plays the tracks in
random order in that folder.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold
this button for less than two seconds to reverse
at 10 times the normal playing speed. Press
and hold it for more than two seconds to reverse
at 20 times the normal playing speed. Release
this button to play the passage. REV and the
elapsed time of the track displays.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold
this button for less than two seconds to advance
at 10 times the normal playing speed. Press
and hold it for more than two seconds to advance
at 20 times the normal playing speed. Release
this button to play the passage. FWD and
the elapsed time of the track displays.
238
6 RDM (Random): To play the tracks in random
order in the current folder or playlist, press
and release this button. FLDR RDM (folder
random) displays. Once all of the tracks in the
current folder or playlist have played, the system
moves to the next folder or playlist and plays
all of the tracks in random order.
To play all the tracks in random order on the
CD, press and hold this button for two seconds.
A beep sounds and DISC RDM (disc random)
displays. This feature does not work with playlists.
When in random, pressing and releasing either
SEEK arrow takes the CD to the previous or to
the next random track.
Press and release this button again to turn off
random play. NO RDM (no random) displays.
q SEEK r: Press the left SEEK arrow to go
to the start of the previous track. Press the
right SEEK arrow to go to the start of the next
track. Pressing either SEEK arrow for more than
two seconds searches the previous or next
tracks at two tracks per second. Release the
button to stop searching and to play the track.
o TUNE p: Turning this knob fast tracks
reverse or advances through the tracks in all
folders or playlists. The track number and
file name displays for each track. Turning this
knob while in random fast tracks reverse or
advances the tracks in sequential order.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switch
between track mode, folder/playlist mode, and
time of day mode. The display shows only eight
characters, but there can be up to four pages
of text. If there are more than eight characters
in the song, folder, or playlist name, pressing this
knob within two seconds takes you to the next
page of text. If there are no other pages to
be shown, pressing this knob within two seconds
takes you to the next display mode.
• Track mode displays the current track number
and the ID3 tag song name.
• Folder/playlist mode displays the current folder
or playlist number and the folder/playlist name.
• Time of day mode displays the time of day
and the ID3 tag song name.
To change the default on the display, press the
DISPL knob until you see the desired display,
then press and hold this knob for two seconds.
The radio produces one beep and the selected
display is now the default.
INFO (Information): INFO displays when a
current track has ID3 tag information. Press this
button to display the artist name and album
contained in the tag. INFO disappears from the
display when the information in the ID3 tag
has finished being read.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The inactive CD remains
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a
CD when listening to the radio. The CD symbol
illuminates on the display when a CD is loaded.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD.
Eject can activate while either the ignition or
radio is off. CDs can be loaded with the ignition
and radio off if this button is pressed first.
239
XM Radio Messages
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit
Language Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
Updating
Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signl
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicle
is moved into an open area, the signal should return.
Loading
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The radio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavl
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
240
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Lock
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in your vehicle could have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your dealer/retailer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
could be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
Check XM
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of
time, the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your
dealer/retailer.
241
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Radio Reception
Non-RDS Radios
You may experience frequency interference and
static during normal radio reception if items
such as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic devices
are plugged into the accessory power outlet.
If there is interference or static, unplug the item
from the accessory power outlet.
®
THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage
theft of your vehicle’s radio. The feature works
automatically by learning a portion of the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). If the radio
is moved to a different vehicle, it does not
operate and LOC displays.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does
not operate if stolen.
RDS Radios
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft
of your vehicle’s radio. The feature works
automatically by learning a portion of the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). If the radio
is moved to a different vehicle, it does not
operate and LOCKED displays.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the
blinking red light indicates that THEFTLOCK®
is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio does
not operate if stolen.
242
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than
for FM, especially at night. The longer range
can cause station frequencies to interfere with
each other. For better radio reception, most
AM radio stations will boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also occur when
things like storms and power lines interfere with
radio reception. When this happens, try reducing
the treble on your radio.
FM Stereo
Care of Your CDs
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM
signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans
the bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of
a CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly or
not at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take
a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth
in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and
out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels
may cause loss of the XM™ signal for a period
of time. The radio may display No Signl to
indicate interference.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface.
Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of the CD Player
Do not use CD lens cleaners for CD players
because the lens of the CD optics can become
contaminated by lubricants.
243
Fixed Mast Antenna
Chime Level Adjustment
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car
washes without being damaged. If the mast should
ever become slightly bent, straighten it out by
hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.
The radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chime
level. To change the volume level of the chime,
press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignition
on and the radio power off. The volume level
will change from the normal level to loud,
and LOUD will appear on the radio display.
To change back to the default or normal setting,
press and hold pushbutton 6 again. The volume
level will change from the loud level to normal,
and NORMAL will appear on the radio display.
Each time the chime volume is changed,
three chimes will sound to indicate the new
volume selected. Removing the radio and
not replacing it with a factory radio or chime
module will disable vehicle chimes.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is
still tightened to the fender. If tightening is
required, tighten by hand, then with a wrench
one quarter turn.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on
the roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear
of snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.
A vehicle with a sunroof might not get the best
performance from the XM™ system if the sunroof
is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can
interfere with the performance of the XM™ system.
Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is
not obstructed.
244
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle ............................................ 246
Defensive Driving ...................................... 246
Drunken Driving ........................................ 247
Control of a Vehicle .................................. 250
Braking ...................................................... 250
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 251
Braking in Emergencies ............................. 253
Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 253
Limited-Slip Rear Axle ............................... 254
Steering .................................................... 255
Off-Road Recovery .................................... 257
Passing ..................................................... 257
Loss of Control .......................................... 259
Off-Road Driving ........................................ 260
Driving at Night ......................................... 276
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 278
City Driving ............................................... 281
Freeway Driving ........................................ 282
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 283
Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 284
Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 284
Winter Driving ........................................... 286
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow ................................. 290
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 291
Recovery Hooks ........................................ 292
Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 293
Truck-Camper Loading Information ............ 299
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab ............ 299
Towing ........................................................ 299
Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 299
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 300
Towing a Trailer ........................................ 306
Trailer Recommendations .......................... 320
245
Your Driving, the Road,
and Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in
your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They
Are for Everyone on page 20.
246
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,
or expressways, it means “Always expect
the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians
or other drivers are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. Rear-end
collisions are about the most preventable
of accidents. Yet they are common.
Allow enough following distance.
Defensive driving requires that a driver
concentrate on the driving task. Anything
that distracts from the driving task makes
proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with
resulting injury. Ask a passenger to help
do these things, or pull off the road in
a safe place to do them. These simple
defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and
driving is a national tragedy. It is the number one
contributor to the highway death toll, claiming
thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more
than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths
have been associated with the use of alcohol,
with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half
the adult population — choose never to drink
alcohol, so they never drive after drinking.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in
every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good
medical, psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink
alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?
How much is “too much” if someone plans
to drive? It is a lot less than many might think.
Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before
and during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
247
According to the American Medical Association,
a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up
with a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person
would reach the same BAC by drinking three
4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed
drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of
liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.
A person who consumes food just before or during
drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water than
men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher
BAC level than a man of her same body weight
will when each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout
Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower.
For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France
and Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial
drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have
seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the
drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,
248
But the ability to drive is affected well below
a BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that
the driving skills of many people are impaired
at a BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that
the effects are worse at night. All drivers are
impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a
collision increases sharply for drivers who have a
BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a
BAC level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her
chance of having a collision. At a BAC level of
0.10 percent, the chance of this driver having
a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of
0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the
alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or
number of cold showers will speed that up.
“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What if
there is an emergency, a need to take sudden
action, as when a child darts into the street? A
person with even a moderate BAC might not be
able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There is something else about drinking and
driving that many people do not know. Medical
research shows that alcohol in a person’s system
can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart.
This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if the person had not
been drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,
attentiveness, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with
a driver who has been drinking. Ride
home in a cab; or if you are with a group,
designate a driver who will not drink.
249
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems
have to do their work at the places where the tires
meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow
or ice, it is easy to ask more of those control
systems than the tires and road can provide.
That means you can lose control of your vehicle.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 324.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 189.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
250
First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to
bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of
a second. But that is only an average. It might
be less with one driver and as long as two or
three seconds or more with another. Age, physical
condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight
all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and
frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,
a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in
an emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary
greatly with the surface of the road, whether it
is pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,
whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the
condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people
drive in spurts — heavy acceleration followed
by heavy braking — rather than keeping pace
with traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may
not have time to cool between hard stops.
The brakes will wear out much faster if you do
a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the
traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you
are driving, brake normally but do not pump the
brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder
to push down. If the engine stops, you will still
have some power brake assist. But you will use
it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stop and the
brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system
that will help prevent a braking skid.
When you start the engine and begin to drive
away, ABS will check itself. You might hear
a momentary motor or clicking noise while this
test is going on. This is normal.
If there is a problem
with the ABS, this
warning light will stay
on. See Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light
on page 190.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 324.
251
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than
any driver could. The computer is programmed
to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the
obstacle while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving
safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of
you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each
front wheel and at both rear wheels.
252
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time
you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal
or always decrease stopping distance. If you
get too close to the vehicle in front of you,
you will not have time to apply the brakes if that
vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though
you have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake
pedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.
You might feel the brakes vibrate or notice
some noise, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help
you more than even the very best braking.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle may have a Traction Control
System (TCS) that limits wheel spin. This is
especially useful in slippery road conditions.
The system operates only if it senses that
one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
the system reduces engine power and may
also upshift the transmission to limit wheel spin.
You may feel or hear the system working,
but this is normal.
The TCS button is
located on your
instrument panel.
Press this button
to turn the TCS
off and on.
When the traction control system is turned off,
an indicator light on the button will illuminate.
253
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control
on page 166.
TCS operates in all transmission shift lever
positions. But the system can upshift the
transmission only as high as the shift lever position
you have chosen, so you should use the lower
gears only when necessary. See Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 124 and/or
Manual Transmission Operation on page 126
for more information.
If there is a problem with TCS, TRACTION FAULT
will be displayed on your Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 202 for more information.
When this warning is displayed, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
254
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, you should always leave TCS on.
But you can turn the system off if you ever need to.
You should turn the system off if your vehicle
ever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking
the vehicle is required. See Rocking Your Vehicle
to Get It Out on page 291 and If Your Vehicle is
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 290 for
more information.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 324 for more information.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
If your vehicle has this feature, your limited-slip
rear axle can give you additional traction on snow,
mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard
axle most of the time, but when one of the
rear wheels has no traction and the other does,
this feature will allow the wheel with traction
to move the vehicle.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the
engine stops or the system is not functioning,
you can steer but it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is
subject to the same laws of physics when driving
on curves. The traction of the tires against the road
surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change
its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is
no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in
the same direction. If you have ever tried to steer
a vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on
the condition of the tires and the road surface,
the angle at which the curve is banked, and your
speed. While you are in a curve, speed is the
one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have
to do their work where the tires meet the road.
Adding the sudden acceleration can demand
too much of those places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease
up on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle
the way you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions.
Under less favorable conditions you will want
to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while
the front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through
the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.
Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve,
and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can
affect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 324.
255
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more
effective than braking. For example, you come
over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or
a child darts out from between parked cars
and stops right in front of you. You can avoid
these problems by braking — if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply the brakes. See Braking
on page 250. It is better to remove as much speed
as you can from a possible collision. Then steer
around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention
and a quick decision. If you are holding the
steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock
positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very
quickly without removing either hand. But you
have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly
straighten the wheel once you have avoided
the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.
256
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you
are driving.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter
turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement
edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another
on a two-lane highway waits for just the right
moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle
ahead, then goes back into the right lane again.
A simple maneuver?
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly
below the pavement, recovery should be
fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then,
if there is nothing in the way, steer so that your
vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a
two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,
since the passing vehicle occupies the same
lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.
A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief
surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly
put the passing driver face to face with the worst
of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
257
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides,
and to crossroads for situations that might
affect your passing patterns. If you have any
doubt whatsoever about making a successful
pass, wait for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your
pass. A broken center line usually indicates it is
all right to pass, providing the road ahead is
clear. Never cross a solid line on your side of
the lane or a double solid line, even if the road
seems empty of approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your
area of vision, especially if you are following a
larger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate
space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or
stops. Keep back a reasonable distance.
258
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming
up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane
and do not get too close. Time your move so
you will be increasing speed as the time comes
to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to
pass, you will have a running start that more
than makes up for the distance you would lose
by dropping back. And if something happens to
cause you to cancel your pass, you need only
slow down and drop back again and wait for
another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow
vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that
someone is not trying to pass you as you pull
out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to
glance over your shoulder and check the
blind spot.
• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and start your left lane change signal
before moving out of the right lane to pass.
When you are far enough ahead of the passed
vehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s inside
mirror, activate the right lane change signal and
move back into the right lane. Remember that
an outside convex mirror makes the vehicle
you just passed seem farther away from you
than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing
the next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too
rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not
flashing, it might be slowing down or starting
to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for
the following driver to get ahead of you.
Perhaps you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what
the driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area
of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and
by not overdriving those conditions. But skids
are always possible.
259
The three types of skids correspond to your
vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,
the wheels are not rolling. In the steering or
cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle
causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off
the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the
way you want the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, your vehicle may
straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid
if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road. For
safety, you want to slow down and adjust your
driving to these conditions. It is important to slow
down on slippery surfaces because stopping
distance is longer and vehicle control more limited.
260
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by
shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You might not realize the
surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road
to make a mirrored surface — and slow down when
you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
helps avoid only the braking skid.
Off-Road Driving
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have
four-wheel drive. Also, see Braking on page 250
and Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 251.
If your vehicle does not have four-wheel drive,
you should not drive off-road unless you are on
a level, solid surface.
The airbag system is designed to work properly
under a wide range of conditions, including off-road
usage. Observe safe driving speeds, especially
on rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does
have some definite hazards. The greatest of
these is the terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you have left the great
North American road system behind. Traffic lanes
are not marked. Curves are not banked. There
are no road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough,
uphill, or downhill. In short, you have gone right
back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And
that is why it is very important that you read
this guide. You will find many driving tips and
suggestions. These will help make your off-road
driving safer and more enjoyable.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out.
For example, be sure to have all necessary
maintenance and service work done. Check to
make sure all underbody shields, if the vehicle
has them, are properly attached. Be sure you
read all the information about your four-wheel-drive
vehicle in this manual. Is there enough fuel?
Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels
up where they should be? What are the local
laws that apply to off-roading where you will be
driving? If you do not know, you should check
with law enforcement people in the area. Will you
be on someone’s private land? If so, be sure
to get the necessary permission.
261
Loading Your Vehicle for
Off-Road Driving
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher
than the seatbacks can be thrown
forward during a sudden stop. You
or your passengers could be injured.
Keep cargo below the top of the
seatbacks.
• Unsecured cargo on the load floor
can be tossed about when driving
over rough terrain. You or your
passengers can be struck by flying
objects. Secure the cargo properly.
• Heavy loads on the roof raise the
vehicle’s center of gravity, making
it more likely to roll over. You can
be seriously or fatally injured if the
CAUTION:
262
(Continued)
(Continued)
vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads
inside the cargo area, not on the roof.
Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
There are some important things to remember
about how to load your vehicle.
• The heaviest things should be on the load
floor and forward of the rear axle. Put
heavier items as far forward as you can.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so
driving on the off-road terrain does not
toss things around.
You will find other important information in this
manual. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 293
and Tires on page 377.
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and
satisfying recreation. However, it also raises
environmental concerns. We recognize these
concerns and urge every off-roader to follow
these basic rules for protecting the environment:
• Always use established trails, roads, and areas
that have been specially set aside for public
off-road recreational driving; obey all posted
regulations.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage
the environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,
grasses — or disturb wildlife. This includes
wheel-spinning, breaking down trees, or
unnecessary driving through streams or
over soft ground.
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse
is removed from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires where
permitted, camp stoves, and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from
the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when
going to a remote area. Know the terrain and
plan your route. You are much less likely to
get bad surprises. Get accurate maps of trails
and terrain. Try to learn of any blocked or
closed roads.
It is also a good idea to travel with at least
one other vehicle. If something happens to
one of them, the other can help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure
to read the winch instructions. In a remote area,
a winch can be handy if you get stuck. But you
will want to know how to use it properly.
263
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is
safe and close to home before you go into the
wilderness. Off-road driving does require some
new and different skills. Here is what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals.
Your eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep
the terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your ears
need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds.
With your arms, hands, feet, and body, you will
need to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful
off-road driving. One of the best ways to control
your vehicle is to control your speed. Here are
some things to keep in mind. At higher speeds:
• You approach things faster and you have
less time to scan the terrain for obstacles.
• You have less time to react.
• You have more vehicle bounce when you
drive over obstacles.
• You will need more distance for braking,
especially since you are on an unpaved
surface.
264
{CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing
and quick changes in direction can easily
throw you out of position. This could cause
you to lose control and crash. So, whether
you are driving on or off the road, you and
your passengers should wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different
kinds of terrain. You need to be familiar with
the terrain and its many different features.
Here are some things to consider.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you
over hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,
mud, snow, or ice. Each of these surfaces affects
the steering, acceleration, and braking of your
vehicle in different ways. Depending upon the kind
of surface you are on, you may experience slipping,
sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration,
poor traction, and longer braking distances.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles
can be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or
bump can startle you if you are not prepared
for them. Often these obstacles are hidden
by grass, bushes, snow, or even the rise and
fall of the terrain itself. Here are some things
to consider:
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly
up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or
downhill? There is more discussion of
these subjects later.
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quickly?
When you drive over obstacles or rough
terrain, keep a firm grip on the steering wheel.
Ruts, troughs, or other surface features can
jerk the wheel out of your hands if you are
not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other
obstacles, the wheels can leave the ground.
If this happens, even with one or two wheels,
you cannot control the vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface,
it is especially important to avoid sudden
acceleration, sudden turns, or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different
kind of alertness from driving on paved roads
and highways. There are no road signs, posted
speed limits, or signal lights. You have to use
your own good judgment about what is safe and
what is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving.
At the very time you need special alertness and
driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions, and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You could have a serious — or even
fatal — accident if you drink and drive or ride with
a driver who has been drinking. See Drunken
Driving on page 247.
265
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Approaching a Hill
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or
across a hill. Driving safely on hills requires good
judgment and an understanding of what your
vehicle can and cannot do. There are some hills
that simply cannot be driven, no matter how
well built the vehicle.
When you approach a hill, you need to decide
if it is one of those hills that is just too steep
to climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be
hard to judge. On a very small hill, for example,
there may be a smooth, constant incline with
only a small change in elevation where you can
easily see all the way to the top. On a large
hill, the incline may get steeper as you near the
top, but you may not see this because the crest
of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs.
{CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any
vehicle. If you drive up them, you will
stall. If you drive down them, you cannot
control your speed. If you drive across
them, you will roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have
any doubt about the steepness, do not
drive the hill.
266
Here are some other things to consider as
you approach a hill.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill
get sharply steeper in places?
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will
the surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so
you will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can
block your path, such as boulders, trees,
logs, or ruts?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff,
an embankment, a drop-off, a fence?
Get out and walk the hill if you do not know.
It is the smart way to find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often
have ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed
rocks because they are more susceptible
to the effects of erosion.
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the
hill, you need to take some special steps.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the
steering wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to
maintain your speed. Do not use more power
than you need, because you do not want
the wheels to start spinning or sliding.
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can
be dangerous. You could lose traction,
slide sideways, and possibly roll over.
You could be seriously injured or killed.
When driving up hills, always try to go
straight up.
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to
find another route.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the
top of the hill.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
267
• Sound the horn as you approach the top
of the hill to let opposing traffic know you
are there.
• Use your headlamps even during the day.
They make your vehicle more visible to
oncoming traffic.
{CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full
speed can cause an accident. There could
be a drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even
another vehicle. You could be seriously
injured or killed. As you near the top
of a hill, slow down and stay alert.
268
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls,
or is about to stall, and I cannot make
it up the hill?
A: If this happens, there are some things you
should do, and there are some things you
must not do. First, here is what you should do:
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle
and keep it from rolling backwards. Also,
apply the parking brake.
• If your engine is still running, shift the
transmission to REVERSE (R), release the
parking brake, and slowly back down the
hill in REVERSE (R).
• If your engine has stopped running, you will
need to restart it. With the brake pedal
pressed and the parking brake still applied,
shift the transmission to PARK (P), or shift
to NEUTRAL if your vehicle has a manual
transmission, and restart the engine. Then,
shift to REVERSE (R), release the parking
brake, and slowly back down the hill as
straight as possible in REVERSE (R).
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left
hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock
position. This way, you will be able to tell if the
wheels are straight and maneuver as you
back down. It is best that you back down the
hill with the wheels straight rather than in
the left or right direction. Turning the wheel
too far to the left or right will increase the
possibility of a rollover.
Here are some things you must not do if you stall,
or are about to stall, when going up a hill.
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting
into NEUTRAL (N), or pressing the clutch
if your vehicle has a manual transmission,
to rev-up the engine and regain forward
momentum. This will not work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you
could go out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop
the vehicle. Then apply the parking brake.
Shift to REVERSE (R), release the parking
brake, and slowly back straight down.
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about
to stall when going up a hill. If the hill is
steep enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep
enough to cause you to roll over if you
turn around. If you cannot make it up the
hill, you must back straight down the hill.
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back
down the hill and decide I just cannot
do it. What should I do?
A: Set the parking brake, put the automatic
transmission in PARK (P), or the manual
transmission in FIRST (1), and turn off
the engine. Leave the vehicle and go get
some help. Exit on the uphill side and
stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill.
269
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will
want to consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able
to maintain vehicle control?
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?
Logs? Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a
hidden creek bank or even a river bottom
with large rocks?
270
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then
try to keep your vehicle headed straight down,
and use a low gear. This way, engine drag
can help the brakes and they will not have to
do all the work. Descend slowly, keeping
your vehicle under control at all times.
{CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade.
This could cause loss of control and a
serious accident. Apply the brakes lightly
when descending a hill and use a low
gear to keep vehicle speed under control.
Q: Are there some things I should not do
when driving down a hill?
A: Yes! These are important because if you
ignore them you could lose control and
have a serious accident.
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take
you across the incline of the hill. A hill that
is not too steep to drive down may be
too steep to drive across. You could roll
over if you do not drive straight down.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), or with the clutch pedal
pressed down with a manual transmission.
This is called “free-wheeling.” The brakes will
have to do all the work and could overheat
and fade.
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A: It is much more likely to happen going
uphill. But if it happens going downhill,
here is what to do.
1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular
brakes. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift to PARK (P), or to NEUTRAL with the
manual transmission, and, while still braking,
restart the engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking
brake, and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and
get help.
271
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably
go across the incline of a hill. If this happens,
you have to decide whether to try to drive across
the incline. Here are some things to consider:
{CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too
steep will make your vehicle roll over.
You could be seriously injured or killed.
If you have any doubt about the
steepness of the incline, do not drive
across it. Find another route instead.
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down
may be too steep to drive across. When you
go straight up or down a hill, the length of the
wheel base — the distance from the front
wheels to the rear wheels — reduces the
likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end.
272
But when you drive across an incline, the
much more narrow track width — the distance
between the left and right wheels — may not
prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
Also, driving across an incline puts more weight
on the downhill wheels. This could cause a
downhill slide or a rollover.
• Surface conditions can be a problem when
you drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy
spots, or even wet grass can cause your
tires to slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicle
slips sideways, it can hit something that will
trip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of
the incline even worse. If you drive across a
rock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill
wheels drop into a rut or depression, your
vehicle can tilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide
carefully whether to try to drive across an incline.
Just because the trail goes across the incline
does not mean you have to drive it. The last
vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
Q: What if I am driving across an incline
that is not too steep, but I hit some
loose gravel and start to slide downhill.
What should I do?
A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide
sideways, turn downhill. This should help
straighten out the vehicle and prevent
the side slipping. However, a much better
way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the
surface is like before you drive it.
Stalling on an Incline
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side
of a vehicle stopped across an incline is
dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you
could be crushed or killed. Always get
out on the uphill (high) side of the vehicle
and stay well clear of the rollover path.
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing
an incline, be sure you, and any passengers,
get out on the uphill side, even if the door there
is harder to open. If you get out on the downhill
side and the vehicle starts to roll over, you will
be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of
the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
273
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, your
wheels will not get good traction. You cannot
accelerate as quickly, turning is more difficult,
and you will need longer braking distances.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in
mud — the deeper the mud, the lower the gear.
In really deep mud, the idea is to keep your
vehicle moving so you do not get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change
in wheel traction. But it will depend upon how
loosely packed the sand is. On loosely packed
sand, such as on beaches or sand dunes,
your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has
an effect on steering, accelerating, and braking.
Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns
or abrupt maneuvers.
274
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire
traction. On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose
control. On wet ice, for example, the traction is
so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating.
And if you do get moving, poor steering and
difficult braking can cause you to slide out
of control.
{CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers
can be dangerous. Underwater springs,
currents under the ice, or sudden thaws
can weaken the ice. Your vehicle could
fall through the ice and you and your
passengers could drown. Drive your
vehicle on safe surfaces only.
Driving in Water
{CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your
vehicle downstream and you and your
passengers could drown. If it is only
shallow water, it can still wash away the
ground from under your tires, and you
could lose traction and roll the vehicle
over. Do not drive through rushing water.
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood
waters demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you
drive through it. If it is deep enough to cover
the wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe, do not
try it — you probably will not get through.
Also, water that deep can damage the axle
and other vehicle parts.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.
At faster speeds, water splashes on the ignition
system and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can
also occur if you get the tailpipe under water.
And, as long as the tailpipe is under water, you
will never be able to start the engine. When you
go through water, remember that when the brakes
get wet, it may take you longer to stop.
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 278
for more information on driving through water.
275
After Off-Road Driving
Driving at Night
Remove any brush or debris that has collected
on the underbody, chassis, or under the hood.
These accumulations can be a fire hazard.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to
be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night
vision problems, or by fatigue.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake
linings cleaned and checked. These substances
can cause glazing and uneven braking. Check
the body structure, steering, suspension,
wheels, tires, and exhaust system for damage.
Also, check the fuel lines and cooling system
for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service
due to off-road use. Refer to the maintenance
schedule for additional information.
276
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce
the glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, slow down
and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only
so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe
place and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might require at least twice as
much light to see the same thing at night as a
20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the
day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear
sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble
adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not
wear sunglasses at night. They might cut down
on glare from headlamps, but they also make
a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or
even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust
to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,
as from a driver who does not lower the high
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,
slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your
vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night
is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even
the inside of the glass can build up a film caused
by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and
flash more than clean glass would, making the
pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less
of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve.
Keep your eyes moving; that way, it is easier
to pick out dimly lighted objects. Just as the
headlamps should be checked regularly for proper
aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly.
Some drivers suffer from night blindness — the
inability to see in dim light — and are not even
aware of it.
277
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
And, if your tires do not have much tread left,
you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall
while you are driving. The surface may get wet
suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving
on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.
Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good
shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see
road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,
the edge of the road, and even people walking.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble.
On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate,
or turn as well because your tire-to-road
traction is not as good as on dry roads.
278
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer
fluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs
of streaking or missing areas on the windshield,
or when strips of rubber start to separate from
the inserts.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They
may not work as well in a quick stop and
may cause pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of
water or a car wash, apply the brake pedal
lightly until the brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if
your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure
in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water
is standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles,
and raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there
could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down
when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Driving too fast through large water puddles or
even going through some car washes can cause
problems, too. The water may affect your brakes.
Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to
slow down before you hit them.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can
build up under your tires that they can actually ride
on the water. This can happen if the road is wet
enough and you are going fast enough. When your
vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact
with the road.
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come
in through the engine’s air intake and badly
damage the engine. Never drive through water
that is slightly lower than the underbody of your
vehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles or
standing water, drive through them very slowly.
279
Driving Through Flowing Water
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. If you try to drive through
flowing water, as you might at a low water
crossing, your vehicle can be carried
away. As little as six inches of flowing
water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore
police warning signs, and otherwise
be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
280
just your parking lamps — to help make
you more visible to others.
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra
following distance. And be especially
careful when you pass another vehicle.
Allow yourself more clear room ahead,
and be prepared to have your view
restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See Tires on page 377.
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in
city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip
into an unknown part of the city just as you
would for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and
energy. See Freeway Driving on page 282.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal.
A traffic light is there because the corner
is busy enough to need it. When a light turns
green, and just before you start to move,
check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running
the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets
is the amount of traffic on them. You will want
to watch out for what the other drivers are
doing and pay attention to traffic signals.
281
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive
at the same speed most of the other drivers are
driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a
smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway
as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads
to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the
freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp,
you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine
where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to
merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.
Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, and
glance over your shoulder as often as necessary.
Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads.
But they have their own special rules.
282
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to
the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.
Then use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly
over your shoulder to make sure there is not
another vehicle in your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make
certain you allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to
the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your
exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop
and back up. Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite
sharply. The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your
speedometer, not to your sense of motion.
After driving for any distance at higher speeds,
you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.
If you must start when you are not fresh — such
as after a day’s work — do not plan to make
too many miles that first part of the journey.
Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can
easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you will find experienced and able service experts
in GM dealrships all across North America. They
will be ready and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir
full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you
checked all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the
lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough
for long-distance driving? Are the tires
all inflated to the recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather
outlook along your route? Should you delay
your trip a short time to avoid a major storm
system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
283
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as highway
hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at
the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of
awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road
with the same scenery, along with the hum of the
tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the
rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make
you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,
your vehicle can leave the road in less than a
second, and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,
with a comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road
ahead and to the sides. Check your vehicle’s
mirrors and instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap,
get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat
drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
284
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different
from driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you
are planning to visit there, here are some tips that
can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
See Off-Road Driving on page 260 for information
about driving off-road.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check
all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,
cooling system, and transmission. These
parts can work hard on mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could
get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine assist
the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignition off is dangerous. The brakes
will have to do all the work of slowing
down. They could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Always
have the engine running and your vehicle
in gear when you go downhill.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some
of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when
you go down a steep or long hill.
285
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
Winter Driving
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled
car or an accident.
• You might see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling
rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these
and take appropriate action.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency
supplies in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 377.
286
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,
a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag,
some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a
flashlight, a red cloth, and a couple of reflective
warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under
severe conditions, include a small bag of sand,
a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags
to help provide traction. Be sure you properly
secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires
meet the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, you can have a very slippery
situation. You will have a lot less traction, or
grip, and will need to be very careful.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But
wet ice can be even more trouble because it may
offer the least traction of all. You can get wet ice
when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing
rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice
until salt and sand crews can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,
blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.
287
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile
traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels
will spin and polish the surface under the tires
even more.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop
on a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,
you will want to begin stopping sooner than
you would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) on page 251.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might
be fine until you hit a spot that is covered
with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice
patches may appear in shaded areas where
the sun cannot reach, such as around clumps
of trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a
patch of ice ahead of you, brake before
you are on it. Try not to brake while you
are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
288
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could
be in a serious situation. You should probably
stay with your vehicle unless you know for
sure that you are near help and you can hike
through the snow. Here are some things to do
to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police
that you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket
around you. If you do not have blankets
or extra clothing, make body insulators
from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to
keep warm.
{CAUTION:
You can run the engine to keep warm,
but be careful.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under
your vehicle. This can cause deadly
CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.
CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might
not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away
snow from around the base of your
vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe. And check around again
from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side
of the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.
289
Run your engine only as long as you must. This
saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it
go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat
that you get and it keeps the battery charged.
You will need a well-charged battery to restart the
vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start
the engine again and repeat this only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it
as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long
as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous
exercises every half hour or so until help comes.
290
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,
you will need to spin the wheels, but you do not
want to spin the wheels too fast. The method
known as rocking can help you get out when
you are stuck, but you must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at
high speed, they can explode, and you
or others could be injured. And, the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause
an engine compartment fire or other
damage. When you are stuck, spin the
wheels as little as possible. Do not spin
the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy
parts of your vehicle as well as the tires.
If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting
the transmission back and forth, you can
destroy the transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 398.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear
the area around the front wheels. For four-wheel
drive vehicles, shift into 4HI. For vehicles with
traction control, turn the system off. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 253. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, or with a manual transmission, between
FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R),
spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels
stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly
on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in
gear. By slowly spinning the wheels in the forward
and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking
motion that could free your vehicle. If that does not
get your vehicle out after a few tries, it might need
to be towed out. Or, you can use the recovery
hooks, if your vehicle has them. If your vehicle does
need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle
on page 299.
291
Recovery Hooks
{CAUTION:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of
force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hooks at a sideways
angle. The hooks could break off and you
or others could be injured from the chain
or cable snapping back.
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow
the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged
and it would not be covered by warranty.
For vehicles with recovery hooks at the front of
the vehicle, you can use them if you are stuck
off-road and need to be pulled to some place
where you can continue driving.
292
Loading Your Vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you
do, parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will
find the label attached below the door latch post.
Vehicle’s without a center pillar, like extended
cab models, will have the Tire and Loading
Information label attached to the driver’s side
extended cab door, above the door latch post.
The Tire and Loading Information label shows
the number of occupant seating positions (A),
and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B)
in kilograms and pounds.
293
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
Tires on page 377 and Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 384.
There is also important information on the
Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and
rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label” later
in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
294
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
See Towing a Trailer on page 306 for
important information on towing a trailer,
towing safety, and trailering tips.
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) x 2 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Example 2
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
300 lbs (136 kg)
B
700 lbs (317 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) x 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
295
Certification/Tire Label
Example 3
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) x 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
Label Example
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached
to the bottom section of the center pillar, on the
driver’s side of the vehicle. Vehicles without a
center pillar, like extended cab models, will have
the Certification/Tire label attached to the edge of
the driver’s side, extended cab door, below the door
latch post. The label shows the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo,
and trailer tongue weight, if pulling a trailer.
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers, cargo,
and any accessories or equipment added to
your vehicle after it left the factory should never
exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
296
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your front and
rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and
weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you
with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally
on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
If you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
Similar appearing vehicles may have different
GVWRs and capacity weights. Please note
your vehicle’s Certification/Tire label or consult
your dealer for additional details.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Using heavier suspension components to get
added durability might not change your weight
ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load
your vehicle the right way.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
297
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.
If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there
is a crash, they will keep going.
There is also important loading information for
off-road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your
Vehicle for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road
Driving on page 260.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
rating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.
{CAUTION:
Two-Tiered Loading
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden
stop or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops
of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
By positioning four 2” X 6” wooden planks across
the width of the pickup box, you can create an
upper load platform. The planks must be inserted
in the pickup box depressions. The length of
the planks must allow for at least a 3/4 inch (2 cm)
bearing surface on each end of the plank.
298
When using this upper load platform, be sure the
load is securely tied down to prevent it from
shifting. The load’s center of gravity should be
positioned in a zone over the rear axle.
Any load that extends beyond the vehicle’s
taillamp area must be properly marked according
to local laws and regulations.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the rear axle.
Add-On Equipment
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab
When you carry removable items, you may need
to put a limit on how many people you carry
inside your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle
before you buy and install the new equipment.
General Motors is aware that some vehicle
owners may consider having the pickup box
removed and a commercial or recreational
body installed. However, we recommend that
conversions of this type not be done to pickups.
Owners should be aware that, as manufactured,
there are differences between a chassis cab
and a pickup with the box removed which may
affect vehicle safety.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the rear axle.
A reinforcement kit for mounting a toolbox is
recommended. See your dealer.
Truck-Camper Loading Information
Your vehicle was not designed to carry a
slide-in camper.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional
towing service if you need to have your disabled
vehicle towed. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 466.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes (such as
behind a motorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle
Towing” following.
299
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your
vehicle behind another vehicle — such as behind
a motorhome. The two most common types of
recreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy”
(towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground) and “dolly” (towing your vehicle with
two wheels on the ground and two wheels up
on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment,
many vehicles can be towed in these ways. See
“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing” following.
Here are some important things to consider
before you do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing
vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle
manufacturer’s recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.
300
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering
professional for additional advice and
equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as
you would prepare your vehicle for a long
trip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle
is prepared to be towed.
Dinghy Towing
Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, the drivetrain
components could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be
towed with all four wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive transmissions have no
provisions for internal lubrication while
being towed.
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
3. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P)
or a manual transmission in FIRST (1).
4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to
the tow vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground:
1. Drive the vehicle to be towed into position
behind the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking
Brake on page 133 for more information.
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s
transfer case into NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P) for an
automatic transmission, or if your vehicle
is in gear, for a manual transmission.
You or others could be injured. Make
sure the parking brake is firmly set before
you shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL.
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL.
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 129 for
more information.
301
6. Release the parking brake only after the
vehicle being towed is firmly attached to
the tow vehicle.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven
for six weeks or more, remove the battery
cable from the negative terminal (post) of the
battery to prevent your battery from draining
while towing.
After towing see “Shifting Out of NEUTRAL”
under Four-Wheel Drive on page 129.
lubrication while being towed. To dolly tow a
two-wheel-drive vehicle, you must tow the vehicle
with the rear wheels on the dolly. See “Rear Towing
(Rear Wheels Off the Ground)” later in this section
for more information.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Dolly Towing
Front Towing
(Front Wheels Off the Ground)
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground, the
transmission could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Never tow your vehicle with the rear wheels
on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with
the rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal
302
Use the following procedure to dolly tow your
vehicle from the front:
1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.
2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking
Brake on page 133 for more information.
3. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P)
or a manual transmission in FIRST (1).
4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to
attach and secure the vehicle being towed to
the dolly and then the loaded dolly to the
tow vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s
transfer case into NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P) for an
automatic transmission, or if your vehicle
is in gear, for a manual transmission.
You or others could be injured. Make
sure the parking brake is firmly set before
you shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL.
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL.
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 129 for
more information.
6. Release the parking brake only after the
vehicle being towed is firmly attached to
the tow vehicle.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven
for six weeks or more, remove the battery
cable from the negative terminal (post) of the
battery to prevent your battery from draining
while towing.
After towing see “Shifting Out of NEUTRAL”
under Four-Wheel Drive on page 129.
303
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle
from the rear:
1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.
2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking
Brake on page 133 for more information.
3. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P)
or a manual transmission in FIRST (1).
304
4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to
attach and secure the vehicle being towed to
the dolly and then the loaded dolly to the
tow vehicle. Make sure the wheels are straight
before towing.
For manual transmission vehicles, make sure
the wheels are straight before proceeding
to the next steps. On automatic transmission
vehicles, use an adequate clamping device
to ensure that the front wheels are locked into
the straight position.
5. Release the parking brake only after the
vehicle being towed is firmly attached to
the tow vehicle.
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven
for six weeks or more, remove the battery
cable from the negative terminal (post) of the
battery to prevent your battery from draining
while towing.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
For manual transmission vehicles, make sure
the wheels are straight before proceeding
to the next steps. On automatic transmission
vehicles, use an adequate clamping device
to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
{CAUTION:
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle
from the rear:
1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.
2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking
Brake on page 133 for more information.
3. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P)
or a manual transmission in FIRST (1).
4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to
attach and secure the vehicle being towed to
the dolly and then the loaded dolly to the
tow vehicle.
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s
transfer case into NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P) for an
automatic transmission, or if your vehicle
is in gear, for a manual transmission.
You or others could be injured. Make
sure the parking brake is firmly set before
you shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL.
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL.
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 129 for
more information.
305
6. Release the parking brake only after the
vehicle being towed is firmly attached to
the tow vehicle.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
If the tow vehicle will not be started or driven
for six weeks or more, remove the battery
cable from the negative terminal (post) of the
battery to prevent your battery from draining
while towing.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of NEUTRAL”
under Four-Wheel Drive on page 129.
306
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment
and drive properly, you can lose control
when you pull a trailer. For example, if the
trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not
work well — or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously injured.
You may also damage your vehicle; the
resulting repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Pull a trailer only if you
have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and
information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in costly
repairs that would not be covered by your
warranty. Always follow the instructions in
this section and check with your dealer/retailer
for more information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle,
you should read the information in “Weight of
the Trailer” that appears later in this section.
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle
by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct
equipment, and it has to be used properly.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering.
Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where
you live but also where you’ll be driving. A
good source for this information can be state
or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask
a hitch dealer/retailer about sway controls.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven.
Your engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety
rules. Many of these are important for your safety
and that of your passengers. So please read
this section carefully before you pull a trailer.
307
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km)
that you tow a trailer, don’t drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t make starts
at full throttle. This helps your engine and
other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
• You may want to shift the transmission to
THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear
selection if the transmission shifts too
often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions). If you have a manual transmission
and you are towing a trailer, it’s better not
to use the highest gear.
Three important considerations have to do
with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
308
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig.
For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used
to pull a trailer are all important. It can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on
your vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight
the vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer
Tongue” later in this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming
only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has
all the required trailering equipment. The weight
of additional optional equipment, passengers
and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
The following charts show how much your trailer can weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options.
2WD Regular Cab
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
Automatic Transmission,
2.9L Engine
3.73
3,300 lbs (1 497 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.7L Engine
3.73
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 855 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.9L Engine
3.73
2,300 lbs (1 043 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should
not be exceeded.
2WD Regular Cab
Mid-Box
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
Automatic Transmission,
2.9L Engine
3.73
3,200 lbs (1 451 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.7L Engine
3.73
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.9L Engine
3.73
2,200 lbs (997 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should
not be exceeded.
309
2WD Extended Cab
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
Automatic Transmission,
2.9L Engine
3.73
3,100 lbs (1 406 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.7L Engine
3.73
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.9L Engine
3.73
2,100 lbs (952 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should
not be exceeded.
2WD Crew Cab
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
Automatic Transmission,
2.9L Engine
3.73
2,900 lbs (1 315 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.7L Engine
3.73
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.9L Engine
3.73
1,900 lbs (862 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should
not be exceeded.
310
4WD Regular Cab
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
Automatic Transmission,
2.9L Engine
3.73
3,000 lbs (1 361 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
2.9L Engine
4.10
3,000 lbs (1 361 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.7L Engine
3.73
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.9L Engine
3.73
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.9L Engine
4.10
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should
not be exceeded.
311
4WD Extended Cab
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
Automatic Transmission,
2.9L Engine
3.73
2,900 lbs (1 315 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
2.9L Engine
4.10
2,900 lbs (1 315 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.7L Engine
3.73
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.9L Engine
3.73
1,900 lbs (861 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.9L Engine
4.10
1,900 lbs (861 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should
not be exceeded.
4WD Crew Cab
Automatic Transmission,
3.7L Engine
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR*
3.73
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs (4 082 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle
and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should
not be exceeded.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or advice, or you can write us at our
Customer Assistance Offices. See Customer Assistance Offices on page 464 for more information.
312
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total
or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the
vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and
the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you
have a lot of options, equipment, passengers
or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight your vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle
will be carrying that weight, too. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 293 for more information
about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight,
up to a maximum of 500 lbs (226 kg) with a weight
carrying hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue
weight for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch
extension that will position the hitch ball closest
to the vehicle. This will help reduce the effect
of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle.
313
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer
and then the tongue, separately, to see if the
weights are proper. If they aren’t you may be able
to get them right simply by moving some of the
items around in the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability
to carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot
cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additional
weight may reduce your trailering capacity
more than the total of the additional weight.
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs
(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front
axle and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle.
It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a
RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)
of 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg).
The trailer rating should be:
You can expect tongue weight to be at least
10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and
because the weight is applied well behind the
rear axle, the effect on the rear axle will be greater
than just the weight itself, as much as 1.5 times
as much. The weight at the rear axle could
be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg).
Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the
total to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to,
but within the limit for RGAWR as well. The
vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with
some of the latest options and you have a front
seat passenger and two rear seat passengers
with some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well.
314
You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the front axle
weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axle weight.
Your vehicle now weighs:
Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent
of total loaded trailer weight, you can expect that
the largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle
is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It is important that you make sure your vehicle
does not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,
GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating or
Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure you are
not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh
your vehicle and trailer.
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you
may think that you should subtract 700 additional
pounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacity to
stay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer
would only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go
further and think you must limit tongue weight to
less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid exceeding
GVWR. But, you must still consider the effect
on the rear axle. Because your rear axle now
weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put
900 lbs (408 kg) on the rear axle without exceeding
RGAWR. The effect of tongue weight is about
1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs
(408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being able to
handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification/Tire label located at the bottom of the
center pillar on the driver’s side of the vehicle, or
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 293. Then be
sure you don’t go over the GVWR limit for your
vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
315
Weight-Distributing Hitches and
Weight Carrying Hitches
You can use your step bumper hitch for trailers
up to 2,000 lbs (907 kg) total weight, and
200 lbs (90 kg) tongue weight.
Notice: If you use a step-bumper hitch, your
bumper could be damaged in sharp turns.
Make sure you have ample room when turning
to avoid contact between the trailer and
the bumper.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your
vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains
under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the
tongue from contacting the road if it becomes
separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety
chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. For trailers up to
2,000 lbs (907 kg) you may attach the safety chains
to the attaching points on the bumper. For heavier
trailers, follow the trailer or hitch manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains.
Always leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag
on the ground.
316
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes — and they
must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able
to install, adjust and maintain them properly.
Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the
vehicle’s hydraulic brake system only if:
• The trailer parts can withstand
3,000 psi (20 650 kPa) of pressure.
• The trailer’s brake system will use less
than 0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from
your vehicle’s master cylinder. Otherwise,
both braking systems won’t work well.
You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, then make the
brake fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder
that sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t
use copper tubing for this. If you do, it will bend
and finally break off. Use steel brake tubing.
Driving with a Trailer
Following Distance
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Before setting out for the open road,
you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint
yourself with the feel of handling and braking
with the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving
is now a good deal longer and not nearly
as responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead
as you would when driving your vehicle without
a trailer. This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sudden turns.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start your vehicle and
trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake
controller by hand to be sure the brakes are
working. This lets you check your electrical
connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure
that the load is secure, and that the lamps and
any trailer brakes are still working.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a
good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you can
return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with
one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,
just move that hand to the left. To move the
trailer to the right, move your hand to the right.
Always back up slowly and, if possible, have
someone guide you.
317
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while
trailering could cause the trailer to come in
contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could
be damaged. Avoid making very sharp
turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well
in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have
extra wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal flasher.
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change.
Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you’re about to
turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your
instrument panel will flash for turns even if
the bulbs on the trailer are burned out.
318
Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing
your signal when they are not. It’s important to
check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are
still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before
you start down a long or steep downgrade.
If you don’t shift down, you might have to use
your brakes so much that they would get hot
and no longer work well.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill
grades, consider the following: Engine coolant
will boil at a lower temperature than at normal
altitudes. If you turn your engine off immediately
after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
your vehicle may show signs similar to engine
overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run
while parked (preferably on level ground) with
the automatic transmission in PARK (P) (or
the manual transmission out of gear and the
parking brake applied) for a few minutes before
turning the engine off. If you do get the overheat
warning, see Engine Overheating on page 348.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your
vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.
If something goes wrong, your rig could
start to move. People can be injured,
and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,
here’s how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet, or into gear for a manual
transmission. When parking uphill, turn your
wheels away from the curb. When parking
downhill, turn your wheels into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks under the
trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place,
release the regular brakes until the
chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P),
or REVERSE (R) for a manual transmission.
See Parking Brake on page 133 for more
information.
5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear
and not in NEUTRAL. See Four-Wheel
Drive on page 129 for more information.
6. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave
After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the
pedal down while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear
of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and
store the chocks.
319
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle will need service more often
when you’re pulling a trailer. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 442 for more on this.
Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid
(don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt,
cooling system and brake system. Each of these
is covered in this manual, and the Index will
help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering,
it’s a good idea to review these sections before
you start your trip.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a four-pin
trailer towing harness. This harness has a four-pin
trailer connector that is attached to a bracket on
the hitch platform. The four-wire harness contains
the following trailer circuits:
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
• Brown: Taillamps/Park lamps
• White: Ground
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts
and bolts are tight.
Trailer Recommendations
You must subtract your hitch load from the CWR
for your vehicle. Weigh your vehicle with your trailer
attached, so that you won’t go over the GVWR or
the GAWR.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread
out the weight of your load the right way, and if
you choose the correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information, see Towing a Trailer
on page 306 later in this section.
320
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ........................................................ 324
Accessories and Modifications ................... 324
California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 324
Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 325
Adding Equipment to the
Outside of Your Vehicle ......................... 325
Fuel ............................................................. 326
Gasoline Octane ........................................ 326
Gasoline Specifications .............................. 326
California Fuel ........................................... 326
Additives ................................................... 326
Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 327
Filling the Tank ......................................... 328
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 330
Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 331
Hood Release ........................................... 331
Engine Compartment Overview .................. 332
Engine Oil ................................................. 333
Engine Oil Life System .............................. 336
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 338
Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 339
Manual Transmission Fluid ........................ 342
Hydraulic Clutch ........................................ 344
Engine Coolant .......................................... 345
Radiator Pressure Cap .............................. 348
Engine Overheating ................................... 348
Cooling System ......................................... 350
Engine Fan Noise ..................................... 355
Power Steering Fluid ................................. 355
Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 356
Brakes ...................................................... 357
Battery ...................................................... 361
Jump Starting ............................................ 362
Rear Axle .................................................... 368
Four-Wheel Drive ........................................ 368
Front Axle ................................................... 369
321
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 370
Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 370
Headlamps ................................................ 371
Front Turn Signal, Parking and
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .............. 372
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL) ................................ 372
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps ............................... 373
License Plate Lamp ................................... 374
Replacement Bulbs ................................... 374
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 375
Tires ............................................................ 377
Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 378
Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 381
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 384
Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 385
322
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 390
When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 391
Buying New Tires ...................................... 392
Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 394
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 395
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 396
Wheel Replacement .................................. 396
Tire Chains ............................................... 398
If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 399
Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 400
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 401
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ....................................... 404
Secondary Latch System ........................... 412
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools .............................................. 416
Spare Tire ................................................. 420
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Appearance Care ........................................ 422
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 422
Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 423
Leather ...................................................... 424
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 425
Care of Safety Belts .................................. 425
Weatherstrips ............................................ 425
Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 426
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 426
Finish Care ............................................... 426
Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 427
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated
Wheels and Trim ................................... 428
Tires ......................................................... 429
Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 429
Finish Damage .......................................... 429
Underbody Maintenance ............................ 430
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 430
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 431
Vehicle Identification .................................. 432
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 432
Service Parts Identification Label ............... 432
Electrical System ........................................ 432
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 432
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 433
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 433
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 433
Capacities and Specifications .................... 437
323
Service
Accessories and Modifications
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants
you to be happy with it. We hope you will go to
your dealer for all your service needs. You will
get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle
they can affect your vehicle’s performance and
safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems
like anti-lock brakes, traction control and stability
control. Some of these accessories may even cause
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement
and function with other systems on your vehicle.
Your GM dealer/retailer can accessorize your
vehicle using genuine GM Accessories. When
you go to your GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM
Accessories, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine GM Accessories.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all
GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain
and/or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many
parts and systems (including some inside the
vehicle), many fluids, and some component wear
by-products contain and/or emit these chemicals.
324
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could
be damaged if you try to do service work
on a vehicle without knowing enough
about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement
parts, and tools before you attempt
any vehicle maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to do your own service work, see
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 94.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of any service
work you perform. See Maintenance Record
on page 456.
Adding Equipment to the
Outside of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may
cause wind noise and affect windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
If you want to do some of your own service work,
you should use the proper service manual.
It tells you much more about how to service
your vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 476.
325
Fuel
California Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important
part of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.
To help keep the engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, GM recommends
the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate
on fuels that meet California specifications.
See the underhood emission control label.
If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, your vehicle will
operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may
fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 192. If this occurs, return to
your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is
determined that the condition is caused by the
type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is
less than 87, you might notice an audible knocking
noise when you drive, commonly referred to as
spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If you are
using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you
hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines
may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). General Motors recommends
against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See
Additives on page 326 for additional information.
326
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the
United States are now required to contain additives
that will help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing your emission
control system to work properly.
In most cases, you should not have to add
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines
contain only the minimum amount of additive
required to meet U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle
experiences problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your dealer has
additives that will help correct and prevent
most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers
and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may
be available in your area. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines if they
comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels
containing more than 10% ethanol must not
be used in vehicles that were not designed
for those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in the fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage would
not be covered under your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you
buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.
General Motors recommends against the use of
such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system may be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your dealer for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be
hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other
fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.
Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would
not be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
327
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid
injuries to you and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not use
cellular phones. Keep sparks, flames,
and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle. This is
against the law in some places. Do not
re-enter the vehicle while pumping fuel.
Keep children away from the fuel pump;
never let children pump fuel.
328
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged
fuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly
counterclockwise.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from
the hook on the fuel door.
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the
fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and
then something ignites it, you could be
badly burned. This spray can happen if
your tank is nearly full, and is more likely
in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly
and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have
finished pumping before removing the nozzle.
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as
possible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 426.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise
until it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. If the fuel cap is not properly installed,
the FUEL CAP message will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) and the check engine
light will be lit on the instrument panel cluster.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 202
and Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 192
for more information.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling,
do not remove the nozzle. Shut off the
flow of fuel by shutting off the pump
or by notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure
to get the right type. Your dealer/retailer
can get one for you. If you get the wrong type,
it may not fit properly. This may cause your
malfunction indicator lamp to light and
may damage your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 192.
329
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with
Never fill a portable fuel container while
it is in your vehicle. Static electricity
discharge from the container can ignite
the gasoline vapor. You can be badly
burned and your vehicle damaged if
this occurs. To help avoid injury to you
and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is
inside a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk,
pickup bed, or on any surface other
than the ground.
CAUTION:
330
CAUTION:
(Continued)
the inside of the fill opening before
operating the nozzle. Contact should
be maintained until the filling is
complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping
gasoline.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping gasoline.
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine
parts and start a fire. These include
liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,
windshield washer and other fluids, and
plastic or rubber. You or others could be
burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it.
It is located inside
the vehicle on the
lower left side of the
instrument panel.
2. Release the secondary latch on the hood.
It is located below the front center of the hood.
3. Lift the hood.
4. Release the hood prop from its retainer and
put the hood prop into the slot in the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve
pressure on the hood prop. Remove the hood
prop from the slot in the hood and return the prop
to its retainer. Lower the hood 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm) above the vehicle and release it
to latch fully. Check to make sure the hood is
closed and repeat the procedure if necessary.
331
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 2.9L engine (3.7L engine similar), you will see the following:
332
A. Windshield Washer Fluid. See “Adding Washer
Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 356.
B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine
Coolant on page 345.
C. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 338.
D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (low in engine
compartment). See Power Steering Fluid
on page 355.
E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick
(If Equipped). See “Checking the Fluid Level”
under Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 339.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
Oil” under Engine Oil on page 333.
G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Cooling System
on page 350.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND).
See Jump Starting on page 362.
I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 333.
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump
Starting on page 362.
K. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” under
Brakes on page 357.
L. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on page 433.
M. Battery. See Battery on page 361.
N. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Reservoir (If Equipped).
See Hydraulic Clutch on page 344.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 332
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several
minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you do
not do this, the oil dipstick might not show the
actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper
towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and
check the level.
333
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area (L),
you need to add at least one quart/liter of oil.
But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine
oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 437.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the
engine has so much oil that the oil level
gets above the cross-hatched area that
shows the proper operating range, the
engine could be damaged.
334
See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 332 for the
location of the engine
oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating range.
Push the dipstick all the way back in when
you are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• Oils meeting these
requirements
should have the
starburst symbol
on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for three things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting
GM Standard GM6094M. Look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30
is best for your vehicle.
Look for this information on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst
symbol on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as
meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing
the American Petroleum Institute Certified
For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure
to use the recommended oil can result in
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
335
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide
easier cold starting and better protection for
the engine at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet
GM Standard GM6094M are all you need for
good performance and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter.
This is based on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change
336
will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil
life system to work properly, you must reset the
system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change
is necessary. A CHANGE OIL message will
come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 202. Change the oil as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions,
the oil life system might not indicate that an
oil change is necessary for over a year. However,
the engine oil and filter must be changed at
least once a year and at this time the system must
be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained people
who will perform this work using genuine parts and
reset the system. It is also important to check
the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since
your last oil change. Remember to reset the oil
life system whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle
use. Whenever the oil is changed, reset the
system so it can calculate when the next oil
change is required. If a situation occurs where you
change the oil prior to a CHANGE OIL message
being turned on, reset the system.
To reset the Engine Oil Life system:
1. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON.
2. Press and release the stem in the lower center
of the instrument cluster until the OIL LIFE
message is displayed.
3. Once the alternating OIL LIFE and RESET
messages appear, press and hold the stem
until several beeps sound. This confirms
that the oil life system has been reset.
4. Turn the key to LOCK.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements
that can be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay
on your skin for very long. Clean your skin
and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing
or rags containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer’s warnings about the use and
disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment.
If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all
the oil from the filter before disposal. Never
dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring
it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams
or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking
it to a place that collects used oil. If you have
a problem properly disposing of used oil, ask
your dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local
recycling center for help.
If the CHANGE OIL message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil
life system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 202.
337
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change
after each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval.
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 442 for
more information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each engine
oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,
do the following:
The engine air cleaner/filter is located in the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 332 for more information on location.
1. Unfasten the clips that hold the cover on
and remove the cover.
2. Lift out the engine air cleaner/filter.
3. Inspect or replace the air filter. See Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 454
to determine which filter to use.
4. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/filter cover.
Fasten the clips to hold the cover in place.
338
Automatic Transmission Fluid
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or others
to be burned. The air cleaner not only
cleans the air; it helps to stop flames
if the engine backfires. If it is not there
and the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the
air cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will
damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when you are driving.
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transmission
fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 444, and
be sure to use the transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 452.
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer
service department.
339
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false
reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can
damage your transmission. Too much can
mean that some of the fluid could come out
and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system
parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could
cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if you check
your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
• When outside temperatures are
above 90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be
at normal operating temperature, which is
180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).
340
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are
above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),
drive the vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine
temperature gage moves and then remains
steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle
has been sitting for eight hours or more with
the engine off, but this is used only as a reference.
Let the engine run at idle for five minutes if
outside temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or more.
If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have
to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be
low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid
hot will give you a more accurate reading of
the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the
shift lever in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the
shift lever through each gear range, pausing
for about three seconds in each range.
Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes
or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow
these steps:
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the
dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
The automatic
transmission dipstick
handle with this symbol
on it is located in the
engine compartment
on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 332 for more information on location.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds
and then pull it back out again.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read
the lower level. The fluid level must be in the
COLD area, below the cross-hatched area, for
a cold check or in the HOT or cross-hatched
area for a hot check. Be sure to keep the
dipstick pointed down to get an accurate
reading.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,
push the dipstick back in all the way; then
flip the handle down to lock the dipstick
in place.
341
How to Add Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of transmission fluid to use. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 452.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission
fluid while it is hot. A cold check is used only as a
reference. If the fluid level is low, add only enough
of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT
area for a hot check. It does not take much fluid,
generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic
transmission fluid may damage your vehicle,
and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the automatic
transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 452.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push
the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the
handle down to lock the dipstick in place.
342
Manual Transmission Fluid
When to Check
A good time to have it checked is when the
engine oil is changed. However, the fluid in your
manual transmission does not require changing.
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult,
you may choose to have this done at your
GM dealer/retailer service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can
damage your transmission. Too little fluid
could cause the transmission to overheat.
Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off,
the vehicle is parked on a level place and the
transmission is cool enough for you to rest your
fingers on the transmission case.
Then, follow these steps:
How to Add Fluid
Here is how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 452.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only
enough fluid to bring the fluid level up to
the bottom of the filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is
fully seated.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the
bottom of the filler plug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug
and be sure it is fully seated. If the fluid level
is low, add more fluid as described in the
next steps.
343
When to Check and What to Use
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoir
is filled with hydraulic clutch fluid.
The hydraulic clutch
fluid reservoir cap
has this symbol
on it. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 332 for
reservoir location.
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system.
Adding fluid will not correct a leak.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.
344
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often you should check the fluid level in
your clutch master cylinder reservoir and for the
proper fluid. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 452.
How to Check and Add Fluid
The proper fluid should be added if the level does
not reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it
is in place in the reservoir. See the instructions
on the reservoir cap.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in your vehicle for five years
or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs
first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extended life
coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 348.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down
to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up
to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work
as they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing sooner, at
the first maintenance service after each
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant
in your vehicle.
345
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water
and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will
not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and the proper coolant.
346
Notice: If you use an improper coolant
mixture, your engine could overheat and be
badly damaged. The repair cost would not be
covered by your warranty. Too much water
in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other parts.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or
additives in your vehicle’s cooling system,
you could damage your vehicle. Use only
the proper mixture of the engine coolant
listed in this manual for the cooling system.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 452 for more information.
Checking Coolant
The coolant recovery
tank cap has this
symbol on it.
It is located toward the rear of the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 332 for more information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When
your engine is cold, the coolant level should be
at FULL COLD, or a little higher. When your
engine is warm, the level could be above the
FULL COLD level.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant
recovery tank.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when
the engine and radiator are hot can allow
steam and scalding liquids to blow out
and burn you badly. With the coolant
recovery tank, you will almost never
have to add coolant at the radiator.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine
and radiator are hot.
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be
careful not to spill it.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant
on hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not
spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the
radiator. For information on how to add
coolant to the radiator, see Cooling System
on page 350.
347
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly
installed, coolant loss and possible engine
damage may occur. Be sure the cap is
properly and tightly secured.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 332
for more information on location.
Engine Overheating
A coolant temperature gage is on the instrument
panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
on page 191.
The air conditioning might stop working if the
engine is too hot. This is normal and helps
cool the engine.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can
burn you badly, even if you just open the
hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it. Just
turn it off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned.
Stop your engine if it overheats, and get
out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because
you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle
can be badly damaged. The costly repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
348
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see
or hear no steam, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a
little too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades”
under Towing a Trailer on page 306.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign
of steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in
NEUTRAL while stopped. If it is safe to
do so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)
or NEUTRAL and let the engine idle.
2. Turn off the air conditioning.
If you no longer have the overheat warning,
you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower
for about 10 minutes. If the warning does not
come back on, you can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and
park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while you are parked. Push down
the accelerator until the engine speed is about
twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least
three minutes while you are parked. If you
still have the warning, turn off the engine and get
everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to
get service help right away.
3. Turn on your heater to full hot at the
highest fan speed and open the windows
as necessary.
349
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood,
here is what you will see:
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Engine Cooling Fan
C. Radiator Pressure Cap
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
350
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should
be at least up to the FULL COLD mark. If it is
not, you may have a leak at the pressure cap or
in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water
pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other
engine parts, can be very hot. Do not
touch them. If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak.
If you run the engine, it could lose all
coolant. That could cause an engine fire,
and you could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine
again. The engine cooling fan speed should
increase when idle speed is doubled by pushing
the accelerator pedal down. If it does not,
your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant is not covered by
your warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing sooner,
at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in
your vehicle.
351
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant
level is not at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50
mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See
Engine Coolant on page 345 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water,
or some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
352
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts. Use the recommended coolant
and the proper coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant
on hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not
spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank
is at the FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one
more thing you can try. Add the proper mixture
directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot
cooling system can blow out and burn you
badly. They are under pressure, and if you
turn the radiator pressure cap — even a
little — they can come out at high speed.
Never turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system
and radiator pressure cap to cool if you
ever have to turn the pressure cap.
1. Remove the radiator pressure cap when the
cooling system, including the upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap
slowly counterclockwise about one full turn.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.
A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
2. Keep turning the cap to remove it.
353
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 345
for more information about the proper
coolant mixture.
4. Fill the coolant recovery tank to the
FULL COLD mark.
5. Reinstall the cap on the coolant recovery tank,
but leave the radiator pressure cap off.
354
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can
feel the upper radiator hose getting hot.
Watch out for the engine cooling fan.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the
radiator filler neck might be lower. If the level
is lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture through the filler neck until the
level reaches the base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap.
At any time during this procedure if coolant begins
to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure
cap. Be sure to secure it tightly.
Engine Fan Noise
This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan.
When the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster
to provide more air to cool the engine. In most
everyday driving conditions, the clutch is not
engaged. This improves fuel economy and reduces
fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer
towing and/or high outside temperatures, the
fan speed increases when the clutch engages.
So you may hear an increase in fan noise.
This is normal and should not be mistaken as
the transmission slipping or making extra shifts.
It is merely the cooling system functioning
properly. The fan will slow down when additional
cooling is not required and the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you
start the engine. It will go away as the fan
clutch disengages.
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located near
the front of the engine
compartment, behind
the radiator. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 332 for
reservoir location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power
steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak
in the system or you hear an unusual noise.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
355
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
1. Turn the key off and let the engine
compartment cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the
reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick
with a clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Then remove the cap again and look at
the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be between the ADD and
FULL marks. If necessary, add only enough
fluid to bring the level up to the proper range.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 452.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the
proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses
and seals.
356
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure
to read the manufacturer’s instructions before
use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area
where the temperature may fall below freezing,
use a fluid that has sufficient protection against
freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 332
for reservoir location.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions
for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to
freeze and damage your washer fluid tank
and other parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as well
as washer fluid.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is very cold.
This allows for fluid expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
the vehicle’s windshield washer system
and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master
cylinder reservoir is
filled with DOT-3 brake
fluid. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 332 for the
location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid
level in the reservoir might go down. The first
is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable
level during normal brake lining wear. When
new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back
up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out
of the brake system. If it is, you should have
the brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later the brakes will not work well.
357
So, it is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you
add fluid when the linings are worn, then you will
have too much fluid when you get new brake
linings. You should add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can
spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if
the engine is hot enough. You or others
could be burned, and your vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic
system. See “Checking Brake Fluid” in
this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
when to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 442.
358
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking
off the cap.
Look at the brake
fluid reservoir. The
fluid level should
be above MIN. If it is
not, have the brake
system checked to
see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not
over the MAX mark.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3
brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 452.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and
the area around the cap before removing it. This
will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
system, the brakes may not work well.
This could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake system can
damage brake system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle
on page 426.
359
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear
drum brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the
brake pads are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when
you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out
brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a
brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or
lightly applied. This does not mean something is
wrong with the brakes.
360
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to
help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are
rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly
tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence
to torque specifications in Capacities and
Specifications on page 437.
Rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators,
but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbing
noise, have the rear brake linings inspected
immediately. Also, the rear brake drums should
be removed and inspected each time the tires
are removed for rotation or changing. When
you have the front brake pads replaced, have
the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as
complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does
not return to normal height, or if there is a
rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be
a sign that brake service might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Battery
Every time you make a brake stop, the brakes
adjust for wear.
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery.
When it is time for a new battery, get one that has
the replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®
replacement battery. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 332 for battery location.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex.
Its many parts have to be of top quality and work
well together if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested
with top-quality brake parts. When you replace
parts of the braking system — for example, when
the brake linings wear down and you need new
ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts
in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,
the balance between the front and rear brakes can
change — for the worse. The braking performance
you have come to expect can change in many other
ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement
brake parts.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
361
Vehicle Storage
Jump Starting
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for
25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)
cable from the battery. This will help keep the
battery from running down.
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may
want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use
the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly
hurt if you are not careful. See Jump
Starting on page 362 for tips on working
around a battery without getting hurt.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
362
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in
costly damage to your vehicle that would
not be covered by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or
pulling it will not work, and it could damage
your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not
a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicles
with 12-volt systems with negative grounds to
jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles
are not touching each other. If they are,
it could cause a ground connection you do
not want. You would not be able to start
your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put
an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a
manual transmission in NEUTRAL before
setting the parking brake. If you have a
four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer
case is not in NEUTRAL.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other
accessories on during the jump starting
procedure, they could be damaged. The
repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting
your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged
into the cigarette lighter or the accessory
power outlets. Turn off the radio and all
lamps that are not needed. This will avoid
sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
363
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+)
and negative (−) terminal locations on the
other vehicle. Your vehicle has a remote
positive (+) and a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 332 for more information
on the terminal locations.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have
been hurt doing this, and some have
been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need
more light.
CAUTION:
364
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Be sure the batteries have enough water.
You do not need to add water to the
ACDelco® battery (or batteries) installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has
filler caps, be sure the right amount of
fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take
care of that first. If you do not, explosive
gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can
burn you. Do not get it on you. If you
accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can
injure you badly. Keep your hands away
from moving parts once the engine is
running.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation. If they do, you
could get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are
some basic things you should know.
Positive (+) will go to positive (+) or to a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−)
or you will get a short that would damage
the battery and maybe other parts too.
And do not connect the negative (−) cable
to the negative (−) terminal on the dead
battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the dead battery.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
365
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything
until the next step. The other end of the
negative (−) cable does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted
metal engine part, or to a remote negative (−)
terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)
cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) away
from the dead battery, but not near engine
parts that move. The electrical connection
is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is
much less.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)
terminal for this purpose.
366
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead
battery. If it will not start after a few tries,
it probably needs service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected
or removed in the wrong order, electrical
shorting may occur and damage the vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Always connect and remove
the jumper cables in the correct order, making
sure that the cables do not touch each other
or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both
vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from
the vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from
the other vehicle.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or
Remote Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
367
Rear Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you
hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate
a problem. Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
The proper level is from 0 to 3/8 inch
(0 mm to 10 mm) below the bottom of the
filler plug hole, located on the rear axle.
What to Use
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 452 to determine which kind of
lubricant to use.
Four-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section apply to this
vehicle. There are two additional systems
that need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to check the lubricant. See Additional
Required Services on page 444.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should
be on a level surface.
368
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should
be on a level surface.
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check your front
axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you
hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate
a problem. Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
A. Drain Plug
B. Filler Plug
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add
some lubricant. Remove the plug and add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler
plug hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 452.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should
be on a level surface.
369
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug
hole, located on the front axle, you may need
to add some lubricant.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant
to raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the
filler plug hole.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 452 to determine what kind of
lubricant to use.
370
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs,
see Replacement Bulbs on page 374.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed
in this section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and can burst if you drop or
scratch the bulb. You or others could
be injured. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions on the bulb package.
Headlamps
A. Low-Beam Headlamp/Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
B. High-Beam Headlamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on
page 331 for more information.
2. Reach in and access the bulb sockets
from inside the engine compartment.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to
remove it from the headlamp assembly
and pull it straight out.
4. Unplug the electrical connector from the old
bulb by releasing the clips on the bulb socket.
5. Replace with a new bulb socket.
6. Plug in the electrical connector to the
new bulb socket.
7. Reinstall the new bulb socket into the
headlamp assembly and turn it clockwise
to secure.
8. Close the hood.
371
Front Turn Signal, Parking and
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on
page 331 for more information.
5. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.
6. Insert the bulb socket into the lamp assembly
and turn it clockwise to secure.
7. Close the hood.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
To replace the CHMSL bulb:
1. Remove the two screws and lift off the lamp
assembly from the vehicle.
2. Reach in to access either one of the bulb
sockets in the engine compartment.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
remove it from the lamp assembly.
4. Holding the socket, pull the old bulb to
release it from the bulb socket.
372
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
remove it from the lamp assembly.
3. Holding the socket, pull the bulb to release it
from the socket.
4. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.
5. Insert the bulb socket into the lamp assembly
and turn it clockwise to secure.
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly and tighten
the screws.
2. Remove the
two rear lamp
assembly
screws near the
tailgate latch.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp
B. Turn Signal/Taillamp
C. Back-up Lamp
3. Pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to
remove it from the taillamp assembly.
5. Holding the socket, pull the old bulb to
release it from the socket.
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the tailgate.
See Tailgate on page 110
for more information.
6. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.
7. Insert the bulb socket into the taillamp
assembly and turn it clockwise to secure.
8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly and tighten
the screws.
9. Close the tailgate.
373
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
License Plate Bulb
Bulb Number
912
W5W
Headlamps
1. Reach under the rear bumper for the bulb
socket.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
pull the bulb socket out of the connector.
3. Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulb
socket.
4. Push the new bulb straight in until it clicks
to secure it.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the
license plate lamp.
374
High-beam
9005
Low-beam/Daytime
Running Lamp (DRL)
9006
Parking/Front Turn Signal
3757KA
Parking Lamp (Inboard)
Stoplamp, Rear Turn Signal,
Taillamp, and Back-up Lamp
3157A
3057
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer/retailer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for
wear and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 442 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. For proper type and
length, see Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 454.
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the
windshield when no wiper blade is installed
could damage the windshield. Any damage that
occurs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touch
the windshield.
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the
wiper arm until it locks into a vertical
position.
A. Blade Assembly
D. Blade Pivot
B. Arm Assembly
E. Hook Slot
C. Locking Tab
F. Arm Hook
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot
locking tab. Pull down on the blade assembly
to release it from the wiper arm hook.
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly.
The insert has two notches at one end that
are locked by bottom claws of the blade
assembly. At the notched end, pull the
insert from the blade assembly.
375
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the
insert (D), notched end last, into the end with
two blade claws (A). Slide the insert all the
way through the blade claws at the opposite
end (B). The plastic caps (C) will be forced
off as the insert is fully inserted.
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the
bottom claws. Make sure that all other claws
are properly locked on both sides of the
insert slots.
376
A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks
in the hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade
assembly onto the windshield.
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet for
details. For additional information refer to the tire
manufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires
can cause overheating as a result
of too much friction. You could have
an air-out and a serious accident.
See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 293.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked
when your vehicle’s tires are cold.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 384.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to
be cut, punctured, or broken by a
sudden impact — such as when
you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn,
or if your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
377
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into
its sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare
tire sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Passenger Vehicle Tire Example
378
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance factors:
treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.
For more information see Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 395.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use
when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.
See “Compact Spare Tire” under Spare Tire on
page 420 for additional information.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number
of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
379
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 384.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect
ratio, construction type and service description.
The letter T as the first character in the tire
size means the tire is for temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
380
(A) P-Metric Tire: The United States version of
a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the
U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 70,
as shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 70 percent as high as
it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used
to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted-bias ply
construction.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is the
maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be
made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 384.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and
coolant, but without passengers and cargo.
381
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 293.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 293.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
rear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 293.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging
from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
382
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum
air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a
tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 293.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 384 and Loading Your Vehicle
on page 293.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at
which a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 391.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 395.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 293.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire
and Loading Information Label” under Loading
Your Vehicle on page 293.
383
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
384
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example
of the Tire and Loading Information label,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 293. How
you load your vehicle affects vehicle handling
and ride comfort. Never load your vehicle
with more weight than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Also check the tire pressure of the spare tire.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, it
should be at 60 psi (420 kPa). See Spare Tire
on page 420 for additional information.
How to Check
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS). This system uses radio and
sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire
and wheel assembly on your vehicle, except
the spare tire. The TPMS sensors monitor the
air pressure in your vehicle’s tires and transmit
the tire pressure readings to a receiver located
in the vehicle.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you
reach the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out
dirt and moisture.
When a low tire pressure condition is detected,
the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressure
warning light located in the instrument panel
cluster, and at the same time display the LOW
TIRE warning message on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). The low tire pressure warning
light and the LOW TIRE warning message appear
at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated
to the correct inflation pressure. For additional
information and details about the DIC operation
and displays see DIC Controls and Displays
on page 198 and DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 202.
385
You may notice, during cooler weather conditions,
that the low tire pressure warning light and the
DIC LOW TIRE message may come on when the
vehicle is first started, and then turn off as you
start to drive. This may be an early indicator
that the air pressure in the tire(s) is getting low
and needs to be inflated to the proper pressure.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety
feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when
one or more of your
tires is significantly
under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
386
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low
tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached
to your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s
original equipment tires and the correct inflation
pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they
are cold. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 293,
for an example of the Tire and Loading
Information label and its location on your vehicle.
Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 384
for additional information.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace
normal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 390, When It Is Time for
New Tires on page 391, and Tires on page 377.
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your
vehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. The
liquid sealant can damage the tire pressure
monitor sensors.
387
TPMS Sensor Identification Codes
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification
code. Any time you replace one or more of
the TPMS sensors or rotate your vehicle’s tires,
the identification codes will need to be matched
to the new tire/wheel position. The sensors
are matched to the tire/wheel positions in the
following order: driver’s side front tire, passenger’s
side front tire, passenger’s side rear tire, and
driver’s side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic
tool. See your dealer for service.
The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing
the tire’s air pressure. If increasing the tire’s
air pressure, do not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.
You will have one minute to match the first
tire/wheel position, and five minutes overall, to
match all four tire/wheel positions. If it takes
longer than one minute, to match the first tire
and wheel, or more than five minutes to match
all four tire and wheel positions the matching
process stops and you will need to start over.
388
The TPMS sensor matching procedure is
outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON with the
engine off.
3. Turn the exterior lamp switch from AUTO
to OFF four times within three seconds.
A double horn chirp will sound and the TPMS
low tire warning light starts flashing. The
double horn chirp and flashing TPMS warning
light indicates the TPMS matching process
has started. The TPMS warning light should
continue flashing throughout the matching
procedure. The LOW TIRE message displays
on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
4. Start with the driver’s side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap
stem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing
or decreasing the tire’s air pressure for
10 seconds, then stop and listen for a single
horn chirp. The single horn chirp should sound
within 15 seconds, confirming that the sensor
identification code has been matched to this
tire and wheel position. If you do not hear the
confirming single horn chirp, turn the ignition
switch to LOCK and start over beginning with
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Step 2. To let air-pressure out of a tire you
can use the pointed end of the valve cap,
a pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key.
Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire,
and repeat the procedure in Step 5.
Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire,
and repeat the procedure in Step 5.
Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the
driver side rear tire, check to see if the TPMS
low tire warning light and the DIC LOW TIRE
messages have turned off. If yes, the TPMS
sensors have been relearned. Turn the ignition
switch to LOCK.
If the low tire warning light and the DIC SERV
TPM messages are on after completing Step 5
for the driver side rear tire, the sensor relearn
process has not been successful. Turn the
ignition switch to LOCK and repeat the
matching process beginning with Step 2.
Set all four tires to the recommended air
pressure level as indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Industry
and Science Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
operates on a radio frequency and complies with
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
operates on a radio frequency and complies with
RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by
other than an authorized service facility could
void authorization to use this equipment.
389
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 391
and Wheel Replacement on page 396 for
more information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely.
Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire.
If it moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten
the cable. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 400.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve
more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.
The first rotation is the most important, see
Scheduled Maintenance on page 442.
390
When rotating your tires, always use one of the
correct rotation patterns shown here.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire or a spare
tire that does not match your vehicle’s road tires
and wheels, in size and type, do not include
the spare in the tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label. For the
location of the Tire and Loading Information label
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 293. Make
certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened,
see “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
Specifications on page 437 for the proper wheel
nut torque specification.
When It Is Time for New Tires
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 400.
Any time you rotate the vehicle’s tires the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will need to be
reset. The TPMS identification codes will need
to be matched to the tire and wheel position.
See “TPMS Sensor Identification Codes” under
Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 385.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining.
Some commercial truck
tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more
places around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through
the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or
snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage
that cannot be repaired well because of the
size or location of the damage.
391
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires
for your vehicle. The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle, when it was new,
were designed to meet General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)
system rating. If you need replacement tires,
GM strongly recommends that you get tires
with the same TPC Spec rating. This way,
your vehicle will continue to have tires that
are designed to give the same performance
and vehicle safety, during normal use, as the
original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.
If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS
for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling
on page 378 for additional information.
392
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control of your vehicle while driving.
If you mix tires of different sizes, brands,
or types (radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle may not handle properly, and
you could have a crash. Using tires of
different sizes, brands, or types may also
cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure
to use the correct size, brand, and type
of tires on all wheels.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Your vehicle may have a compact spare
tire and wheel assembly. If the vehicle
has a compact spare tire and wheel,
they have the same overall diameter
as your vehicle’s full-size tires and
wheels. Because they were designed
and developed for use on your vehicle,
it is all right to drive your vehicle with
the compact spare installed properly.
Compact spare tires are designed for
temporary use only. See Spare Tire
on page 420.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with
those that do not have a TPC Spec number,
make sure they are the same size, load range,
speed rating, and construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 293,
for more information about the Tire and Loading
Information Label and its location on your vehicle.
393
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size
than your original equipment wheels and tires, this
may affect the way your vehicle performs, including
its braking, ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover. Additionally,
if your vehicle has electronic systems such as,
anti-lock brakes, traction control, and electronic
stability control, the performance of these systems
can be affected.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires
not recommended for those wheels are
selected. You may increase the chance
that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and
tire systems developed for your vehicle,
and have them properly installed by a
GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 392 and
Accessories and Modifications on page 324
for additional information.
394
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only
to vehicles sold in the United States. The grades
are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger
car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG) system does not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires, space-saver, or temporary
use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters
of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
395
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you
the longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing
will not be necessary on a regular basis. However,
if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle
pulling to one side or the other, the alignment may
need to be checked. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your tires
and wheels may need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts
should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace
it (except some aluminum wheels, which can
sometimes be repaired). See your dealer/retailer
if any of these conditions exist.
Wheel Replacement
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
396
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and
be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only with new
GM original equipment parts. This way, you will
be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts, and
wheel nuts for your vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground
clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance
to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 400 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision
in which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,
and wheel nuts for replacement.
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has
been used or how far it has been driven.
It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.
If you have to replace a wheel, use a
new GM original equipment wheel.
397
Tire Chains
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has P225/75R15, P265/
75R15, P235/75R15, or P235/50R18 size
tires, do not use tire chains. They can
damage your vehicle because there is not
enough clearance. Tire chains used on
a vehicle without the proper amount of
clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose control
of your vehicle and you or others may
be injured in a crash.
CAUTION:
398
(Continued)
(Continued)
Use another type of traction device
only if its manufacturer recommends
it for use on your vehicle and tire size
combination and road conditions. Follow
that manufacturer’s instructions. To help
avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust, or remove the device if it is
contacting your vehicle. Do not spin the
vehicle’s wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the rear tires.
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other
than P225/75R15, P265/75R15, P235/75R15 or
P235/50R18 use tire chains only where legal and
only when you must. Use chains that are the
proper size for your tires. Install them on the
tires of the rear axle. Do not use chains on the
tires of the front axle. Tighten them as tightly
as possible with the ends securely fastened.
Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear
the chains contacting your vehicle, stop
and retighten them. If the contact continues,
slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or
spinning the wheels with chains on will
damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are
driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’s
tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is much
more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever
have a blowout, here are a few tips about what to
expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel
firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much
like a skid and may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear blowout
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Get the vehicle under control by steering the
way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very
bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to
do maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
or others could be badly injured or killed
if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the
jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to
use the jacking equipment to change a flat
tire safely.
399
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel
damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on
your hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning
Flashers on page 162 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
or fall on you or other people. You and
they could be badly injured or even killed.
Find a level place to change your tire.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
CAUTION:
400
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear – not in NEUTRAL.
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
5. Do not allow passengers to remain
in the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will
not move, put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the
one being changed. That would be the
tire on the other side, at the opposite
end of the vehicle.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of the wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The tools you will need are located under the
passenger’s seat.
Crew Cab
The following information will tell you next how to
use the jack and change a tire.
For crew cab models, the jack and wheel blocks
are located under the driver’s side rear seat.
401
For regular and
extended cab vehicles,
the jack and wheel
blocks are located
under the cover at the
center of the vehicle
behind the front seats.
Regular/Extended Cab
To access the tools:
1. Move the seats
forward to access
the cover.
2. Turn the wing nut on the cover
counterclockwise to remove it.
For crew cab models, reach under the rear
seat to access the jack and wheel blocks.
To reinstall the jack and wheel block assembly
in the mounting bracket, insert the tabs into
the jack base by pushing the blocks up into
the assembly. The outer hole in the jack base
aligns with the tab on the bracket. When
reinstalling, make sure the jack is secure, but
do not overtighten the jack in the bracket.
3. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel
block retainer by turning the wing nut
counterclockwise.
4. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one being
changed. That would be the tire on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
5. Locate the wing nut used to retain the storage
bag and tools which is under the front
passenger’s seat. Remove it by turning the
wing nut counterclockwise.
Extended/Regular Cab
402
You will use the jack handle extensions and the
wheel wrench to remove the underbody-mounted
spare tire.
A. Jack Handle
Extensions
B. Jack
C. Extension Tool
D. Wheel Wrench
E. Wheel Blocks
1. Assemble the wheel wrench (D) and the
jack handle extensions (A).
2. Insert the hoist end (chiseled end) of the
extension tool (C) through the hole in the
rear bumper and into the funnel-shaped guide.
The chiseled end of the extension is used
to lower the spare tire.
3. Turn the wheel wrench (D) counterclockwise
to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue
to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire
can be pulled out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground,
the secondary latch is engaged causing
the tire not to lower. See Secondary Latch
System on page 412.
403
4. Tilt the retainer
when the tire has
been lowered,
and slide it up the
cable so it can
be pulled up through
the wheel opening.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Use the following pictures and instructions as a
guide in removing the flat tire and raising the vehicle.
5. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A),
the wheel blocks (B), the extension tool (C),
the jack handle extensions (D), and the wheel
wrench (E).
404
1. Remove the center cap by placing the chisel
end of the wheel wrench (E) into one of the
slots on the wheel and gently prying the
cap out.
If your vehicle has the Xtreme package,
remove each wheel nut cap with the wheel
wrench and remove the center cap by hand.
2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel
nuts by turning it counterclockwise. Do not
remove the wheel nuts yet.
405
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked
up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off
the jack you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle when
it is supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Front Position
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can damage the
vehicle and even make the vehicle fall.
To help avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head
into the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
406
3. Position the jack (A) under the vehicle as
shown for the front or rear locations.
Front Position
Rear Position
If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle,
position the jack to the rear of the front tire
in the pocket off of the frame.
If the flat tire is on the rear, position the
jack under the rear axle and get as close
as possible to the shock absorber.
4. Make sure the jack head is positioned so that
the rear axle is resting securely between the
grooves that are on the jack head.
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the
vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the spare
tire to fit under the wheel well.
407
6. Remove all the
wheel nuts and take
off the flat tire.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts
to which it is fastened, can make the
wheel nuts become loose after time.
The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from the places where
the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, a cloth or a paper towel can
be used to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed,
to get all the rust or dirt off.
408
7. Remove any
rust or dirt from
the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
9. Put the wheel nuts
back on with the
rounded end of
the nuts toward the
wheel. Tighten each
wheel nut by hand.
Then use the wheel
wrench to tighten
the nuts until the
wheel is held
against the hub.
8. Install the spare tire.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose.
The vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing
a serious accident.
409
Front Position
Rear Position
10. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to
lower the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
410
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel
to come loose and even come off. This
could lead to an accident. Be sure to use
the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new GM
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 437
for wheel nut torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly
tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence
and to the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 437
for the wheel nut torque specification.
11. Tighten the
wheel nuts firmly
in a crisscross
sequence as
shown by turning
the wheel wrench
clockwise.
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire,
you must also reinstall the center cap. Place
the cap on the wheel and tap it into place until
it seats flush with the wheel. The cap only goes
on one way. Be sure to line up the tab on the
center cap with the indentation on the wheel.
For the Xtreme, tighten each nut cap by hand,
then tighten an additional one quarter of a turn
with the wheel wrench.
411
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly that has a secondary latch system.
It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly
falling off your vehicle. For the secondary latch
to work, the spare must be installed with the valve
stem pointing down. See Storing a Flat or Spare
Tire and Tools on page 416.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:
1. Check under the
vehicle to see
if the cable end
fitting is visible.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all
the instructions. Failure to read and follow
the instructions could damage the hoist
assembly and you and others could get
hurt. Read and follow the instructions
listed next.
2. If the cable end fitting is not visible, proceed
to Step 6.
If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable
by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until
you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice.
You cannot overtighten the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel
wrench counterclockwise three or four turns.
412
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times.
If the spare tire lowers to the ground,
continue with Step 5 under Removing the
Spare Tire and Tools on page 401.
5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable
is exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest
ends, with the backs facing each other.
7. Place the bottom
edge of the
jack (A) on the
wheel blocks (B),
separating them
so that the jack is
balanced securely.
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel
wrench to the jack and place it (with the
wheel blocks) under the vehicle towards the
front of the rear bumper. Position the center
lift point of the jack under the wheel.
9. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the
jack until it lifts the tire.
10. Continue raising the jack until the tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place,
the secondary latch has released, and the
tire is balancing on the jack.
413
12. Reinsert the jack handle into the jack.
Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack
until the spare tire slides off the jack or
is hanging by the cable.
{CAUTION:
11. Remove the jack handle and insert the hoist
end of the extension through the hole in the
rear bumper.
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise
one turn or until the wheel retainer assembly
is disengaged.
414
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack.
If the spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind
you or on either side of you as you pull
the jack out from the under spare.
13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to
push against the spare while firmly pulling the
jack out from under the spare tire with the
other hand.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable,
insert the hoist end of the extension into
the hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn
the wheel wrench counterclockwise to
lower the spare the rest of the way.
14. Tilt the tire retainer at the end of the cable
and pull it through the wheel opening.
Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.
15. If the cable is hanging under the vehicle, turn
the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cable.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon
as you can. You will not be able to store
a spare or flat tire using the hoist assembly
until it has been replaced.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing
the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on
page 404.
415
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the
spare tire carrier.
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the
vehicle with the valve stem pointed down.
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment
in the passenger compartment of the
vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in the
proper place.
Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a
flat tire under your vehicle for an extended
period of time or with the valve stem pointing
up may damage the wheel. Always stow
the wheel with the valve stem pointing down
and have the wheel/tire repaired as soon
as possible.
416
2. Tilt the retainer downward and through the
wheel opening. Make sure the retainer is
fully seated across the underside of the wheel.
3. Attach the wheel wrench and extensions
together as shown.
4. Insert the hoist end of the extension through
the hole in the rear bumper and into the
funnel-shaped guide.
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise
the tire part way up. Make sure the retainer
is seated in the wheel opening and the
valve stem is pointed down.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside
of the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise until you feel it skip twice.
You cannot overtighten the cable.
417
To store the tools, do the following:
1. Return the wheel wrench, jack extensions
and the storage bag to the locations
described under Removing the Spare
Tire and Tools on page 401.
2. Install the wheel blocks first.
Then install the jack.
3. Secure the items in the vehicle as
shown next.
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push,
pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire.
If the tire moves, check to make sure the
tire valve stem is pointing down, then use
the wheel wrench to loosen and then
tighten the cable.
418
A. Jack
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Wing Nut
Regular/Extended Cab
Crew Cab
A. Jack
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Wing Nut
419
Spare Tire
Compact Spare Tire
Your vehicle may have a compact spare tire.
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when your vehicle was new, it can lose air
over time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.
It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
Notice: If your vehicle has four-wheel drive
and the compact spare tire is installed on
your vehicle, do not drive in four-wheel drive
until you can have your flat tire repaired and/or
replaced. You could damage your vehicle,
and the repair costs would not be covered
by your warranty. Never use four-wheel drive
when the compact spare tire is installed
on your vehicle.
After installing the compact spare on your
vehicle, you should stop as soon as possible
and make sure your vehicle’s spare tire is
correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 62 mph (100 km/h)
for distances up to 500 miles (804 km).
420
For heavy payloads or towing, and for low traction
or four-wheel-drive conditions, repair or replace
the full-size tire. Of course, it is best to replace
your vehicle’s spare with a full-size tire as soon
as you can. The spare tire will last longer and be
in good shape in case you need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with guide rails. The compact
spare can get caught on the rails. That can
damage the tire and wheel, and maybe
other parts of your vehicle.
Do not use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix your compact spare tire or
wheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.
Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact
spare. Using them can damage your vehicle
and can damage the chains too. Do not use
tire chains on your compact spare.
Full-Size Spare Tire
Your vehicle may have a full-size spare tire,
which, when new, was fully inflated. A spare
tire may lose air over time, so check its inflation
pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 384 and Loading Your Vehicle on
page 293 for information regarding proper tire
inflation and loading your vehicle. For instruction
on how to remove, install, or store a spare tire,
see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire on page 404 and Storing a Flat
or Spare Tire and Tools on page 416.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire
than the road tires originally installed on your
vehicle. This spare was developed for use on
your vehicle, so it is alright to drive on it. If your
vehicle has four-wheel drive and the different
size spare tire is installed, keep the vehicle
in two-wheel drive.
Notice: If your vehicle has four-wheel drive
and the different size spare tire is installed
on your vehicle, do not drive in four-wheel
drive until you can have your flat tire repaired
and/or replaced. You could damage your
vehicle, and the repair costs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never use
four-wheel drive when the different size
spare tire is installed on your vehicle.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle,
you should stop as soon as possible and make
sure the spare is correctly inflated. The spare
tire is made to perform well at speeds up to
62 mph (100 km/h) for distances up to 500 miles
(804 km). For heavy payloads or towing, and
for low traction or four-wheel-drive conditions,
repair or replace the full-size tire. Have the
damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced
as soon as you can and installed back onto
your vehicle. This way, the spare tire will be
available in case you need it again.
Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes,
because they will not fit. Keep your spare tire
and its wheel together.
421
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its
best if it is cleaned often. Although not always
visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on your
upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,
and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is
recommended to remove particles from your
upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes
of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and
garments that transfer color to your home
furnishings may also transfer color to your
vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces
being cleaned. Permanent damage may result from
using cleaners on surfaces for which they were
not intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.
422
Remove any accidental over-spray from other
surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, apply
cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you
could scratch the glass and/or cause damage
to the rear window defogger. When cleaning
the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth
and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your
vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation by
opening your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and
knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you
can also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer
to remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following
cleaners or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object
to remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage
to your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve
the effectiveness of soil removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave a
residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery
while cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result
from the use of many organic solvents such
as naptha, alcohol, etc.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush
attachment frequently to remove dust and loose
dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in
the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to remove
them first with plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil
as possible using one of the following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with
water or club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently
rub toward the center. Continue cleaning,
using a clean area of the cloth each time it
becomes soiled.
423
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until
the cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a
mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric
cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a
commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be
used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness
first. If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may result,
clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed,
a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.
424
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used
to remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning
is necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild
soap solution can be used. Allow the leather to
dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never
use steam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters
or spot removers on leather. Many commercial
leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather
and are not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use
shoe polish on your leather.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used
to remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a
mild soap solution can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers
on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners
and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect
soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of your interior and
are not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the
gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss
on your instrument panel. The increase in
gloss may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see
through the windshield under certain conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you
do, it may severely weaken them. In a
crash, they might not be able to provide
adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During
very cold, damp weather frequent application
may be required. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 452.
425
Washing Your Vehicle
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,
depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm
or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of
the sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not
use strong soaps or chemical detergents.
Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all
soap residue completely. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on
page 431. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives.
All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly
and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they
could stain. Avoid using hard brushes during
cleaning. It may damage your vehicle’s finish.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or
an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches
and water spotting.
426
High pressure car washes may cause water to
enter the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure
washes closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to the
surface of the vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth
and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps
and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing
Your Vehicle on page 426.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your
vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove
residue from the paint finish. You can get approved
cleaning products from your dealer/retailer. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 431.
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish, the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss
to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes
and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for
a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive
waxes and polishes that are made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and
other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar,
tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial
chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if
they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle
as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces
to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,
weather and chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. You can help to
keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your
vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly
to keep their luster. Washing with water is all
that is usually needed. However, you may use
chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim,
if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or
chrome polish, steam or caustic soap to clean
aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish,
is recommended for all bright metal parts.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass
cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth
or paper towel soaked with windshield washer
fluid or a mild detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road
grime, sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
treatments may cause wiper streaking. Replace
the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
427
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated
Wheels and Trim
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean
towel. A wax may then be applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim
may be damaged if you do not wash your
vehicle after driving on roads that have been
sprayed with magnesium, calcium or sodium
chloride. These chlorides are used on roads
for conditions such as ice and dust. Always
wash your vehicle’s chrome with soap
and water after exposure.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or
cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the
surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Use
only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
428
The surface of these wheels is similar to the
painted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong
soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive
cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning
brushes on them because you could damage
the surface. Do not use chrome polish on
aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum
wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,
but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and
buff off immediately after application.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through
an automatic car wash that has silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes, you could
damage the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped
with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses
silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Tires
Finish Damage
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire
cleaner.
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches
in the finish should be repaired right away.
Bare metal will corrode quickly and may
develop into major repair expense.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the
paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire
dressing, always wipe off any overspray
from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired
with touch-up materials available from your
dealer/retailer. Larger areas of finish damage
can be corrected in your dealer’s/retailer’s
body and paint shop.
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet
metal repair or replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to
parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will
provide the corrosion protection while maintaining
the warranty.
429
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal
and dust control can collect on the underbody.
If these are not removed, corrosion and rust can
develop on the underbody parts such as fuel
lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust system
even though they have corrosion protection.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can
create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can
fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the
vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,
ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint surface.
At least every spring, flush these materials
from the underbody with plain water. Clean
any areas where mud and debris can collect.
Dirt packed in close areas of the frame
should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car
washing system can do this for you.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this,
we will repair, at no charge to the owner, the
surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout
condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles
(20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.
430
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step.
No wiping necessary.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans
and lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
431
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle.
It appears on a plate in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver side. You can
see it if you look through the windshield from
outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on
the Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels
and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine
code. This code helps you identify your vehicle’s
engine, specifications, and replacement parts.
432
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the inside of the glove box.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
The label has the following information:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your
vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by your warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before
attempting to add anything electrical to your
vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 94.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats
due to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stop
until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by
some electrical problem, be sure to get it fixed.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected
from short circuits by a combination of fuses
and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces
the chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted, replace the
fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a
new one of the identical size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not
have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the
same amperage. Just pick some feature of your
vehicle that you can get along without — like
the radio or cigarette lighter — and use its fuse,
if it is the correct amperage. Replace it as soon
as you can.
The engine compartment fuse block is located
on the driver’s side of the engine compartment.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 332
for more information on location.
To remove the cover, push in on the tab on the
end of the cover and lift. To reinstall the cover,
line up the tab and push down on the cover
until the tab clicks into place.
433
Fuses
DRL
AUX PWR 1
STOP
BLWR
S/ROOF
434
Usage
Daylight Running Lamps
Accessory Power 1
Brake Switch, Stoplamps
Climate Control Fan
Sunroof (If Equipped)
Fuses
A/C
PWR/SEAT
RT HDLP
Usage
Air Conditioning Control Head,
Power Seats
Power Seat Circuit Breaker
(If Equipped)
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
Fuses
LT HDLP
AUX PWR 2
FOG/LAMP
A/C CMPRSR
WSW
RVC
PWR/WNDW
FUEL/PUMP
STRTR
WPR
ABS 2
DR/LCK
ETC
02 SNSR
CRUISE
HTD/SEAT
AIRBAG
Usage
Driver’s Side Headlamp
Accessory Power 2
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Air Conditioning Compressor
Wiper/Washer Switch
Regulated Voltage Control
Power Windows (If Equipped)
Fuel Pump
Starter Solenoid Relay
Wiper
Anti-lock Brake System 2
(ABS Pump)
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Oxygen Sensors, Air Injection
Reactor (AIR) Relay
Cruise Control Switch,
Inside Rearview Mirror,
Transfer Case Control Module,
Brake Switch, Clutch Disable
Heated Seat (If Equipped)
Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint System, Sensing
and Diagnostic Module
Fuses
ABS
BCK/UP
FRT/AXLE
TRN/HAZRD
REAR
ERLS
PCMI
TRANS
IGN
INJ
ABS 1
FRT PRK
LAMP
REAR PRK
LAMP
Usage
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS),
ABS module, Four-Wheel Drive,
Gravity Sensor
Back-up Lights
Front Axle Actuator
Rear Turn/Hazard Lights
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor,
Can Purge Solenoid, Air Injection
Reactor (AIR) Relay
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Transmission Solenoid
Ignition, Clutch Starter Switch,
Neutral Safety Back-Up Switch,
Ignition Coils 1-5, Air Conditioning
Relay
Injectors
Anti-lock Brake System 1
(ABS Logic)
Front Park/Turn Lamps, Driver and
Passenger’s Side Power Window
Switches Lighting
Rear Parking Lamp 1, Passenger’s
Side Taillamp, License Plate Lamps
435
Fuses
REAR PRK
LAMP2
CLSTR
TRN/HAZRD
FRT
TCCM
HORN
TBC
IGN TRNSD
RDO
ONSTAR
CNSTR VENT
PCM B
Relays
DRL
BEAM SEL
IGN 3 HVAC
RAP
436
Usage
Driver’s Side Rear Taillamp,
Passenger Side Airbag Indicator
Lighting, Instrument Panel Dimming
Power (2WD/4WD switch lighting)
Cluster
Turn/Hazard/Courtesy/
Cargo Lamps/Mirrors
Transfer Case Control Module
Horn
Truck Body Controller
Ignition Transducers
Radio
OnStar®
Fuel Canister Vent Solenoid
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) B
Usage
Daylight Running Lamps
Beam Selection
Ignition 3, Climate Control,
Climate Control Head Fuse,
Power Seat Fuse
Retained Accessory Power
(Power Window Fuse,
Wiper/Washer Switch Fuse),
Sunroof Fuse
Relays
PRK/LAMP
HDLP
FOG/LAMP
FUEL/PUMP
A/C CMPRSR
RUN/CRNK
PWR/TRN
HORN
WPR 2
WPR
STRTR
Usage
Front Parking Lamp Fuse,
Rear Parking Lamps
Headlamps
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Fuel Pump, Fuel Pump Fuse
Air Conditioning Compressor
Run/Crank, Airbag System Fuse,
Cruise Control Fuse, Ignition Fuse,
Back-Up Lamps, ABS Fuse,
Front Axle, PCM-1, Injectors Fuse,
Transmission Fuse, ERLS
Powertrain, Electronic Throttle
Control Fuse, Oxygen Sensor Fuse
Horn
Wiper 2 (High/Low)
Wipers (On/Off)
Starter Relay (PCM Relay)
Miscellaneous
Usage
WPR
Diode — Wiper
A/C CLTCH
Diode — Air Conditioning, Clutch
MEGA FUSE
Mega Fuse
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate conversion capacities are given in English and metric conversions.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 452 for more information.
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant
charge amount, see the refrigerant
caution label located under the hood.
See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
2.9L Engine
10.4 qt
9.8 L
3.7L Engine
10.6 qt
10.0 L
2.9L Engine
5.0 qt
4.7 L
3.7L Engine
6.0 qt
5.7 L
19.5 gal
76 L
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
437
Capacities and Specifications (cont’d)
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Automatic
5.0 qt
4.7 L
Manual
2.3 qt
2.2 L
100 lb ft
140 Y
Transmission (Drain and Refill)
Wheel Nut Torque
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level or as recommended in
this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
438
Type
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
2.9L
9
Automatic
Manual
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
3.7L
E
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 440
Introduction ............................................... 440
Maintenance Requirements ........................ 440
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 440
Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 440
Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 442
Additional Required Services ..................... 444
Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 446
Owner Checks and Services ..................... 447
At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 448
At Least Once a Month ............................. 448
At Least Once a Year ............................... 449
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 452
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 454
Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 455
Maintenance Record .................................. 456
439
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level
and change as recommended.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The
Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties.
See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet
or your dealer for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,
inspections, replacement parts, and
recommended fluids and lubricants as
prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep
your vehicle in good working condition. Any
damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by warranty.
440
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also
helps the environment. All recommended
maintenance is important. Improper vehicle
maintenance can even affect the quality of the air
we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong
tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment,
and to keep your vehicle in good condition, be
sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do
not know exactly how you will drive it. You may
drive very short distances only a few times a week.
Or you may drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle
in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may
need more frequent checks and replacements.
So please read the following and note how you
drive. If you have any questions on how to
keep your vehicle in good condition, see your
GM Goodwrench® dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within
recommended limits. You will find these limits
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 293.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces
within legal driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended
manner. See Off-Road Driving on page 260.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline
Octane on page 326.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on
page 442 should be performed when indicated.
See Additional Required Services on page 444
and Maintenance Footnotes on page 446 for
further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a
vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do
some jobs, you can be seriously injured.
Do your own maintenance work only if
you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, see your GM
Goodwrench® dealer to have a qualified
technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 325.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have
your GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer
for your service needs, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
441
If you want to purchase service information,
see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 476.
Owner Checks and Services on page 447 tells
you what should be checked, when to check it,
and what you can easily do to help keep your
vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and
lubricants to use are listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 452 and Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 454.
When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these
are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the
use of genuine GM parts.
442
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL message comes on, it
means that service is required for your vehicle.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 202.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible
within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible
that, if you are driving under the best conditions,
the engine oil life system may not indicate
that vehicle service is necessary for over a year.
However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time
the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained service technicians who will perform this
work using genuine parts and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset
accidentally, you must service your vehicle within
3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.
Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System
on page 336 for information on the Engine Oil
Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE OIL message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are
required. Required services are described in the
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that your first
service be Maintenance I, your second service
be Maintenance II, and that you alternate
Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.
However, in some cases, Maintenance II may
be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the
CHANGE OIL message comes on within
10 months since the vehicle was purchased
or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the
previous service performed was Maintenance I.
Always use Maintenance II whenever the
message comes on 10 months or more since
the last service or if the message has not
come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 333. Reset oil life system.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 336. An Emission Control Service.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 338. See footnote (j).
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 390 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once
a Month on page 448.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid
as needed.
•
•
443
Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Check transmission and transfer case fluid levels and add fluid as needed.
•
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose
or damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
444
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on page 338.
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter (severe service).
See footnote (h).
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter (normal service).
•
Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
•
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (k).
•
445
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,
etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect drum brake
linings/shoes for wear or cracks. Inspect other
brake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders,
calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking
brake adjustment.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension
and steering system for damaged, loose, or
missing parts or signs of wear. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up,
binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check
constant velocity joints, rubber boots, and axle
seals for leaks.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.
Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace
with genuine parts as needed. To help ensure
proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling
system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
446
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking,
or contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper
blades, if contaminated. Replace wiper blades
that are worn or damaged. See Windshield
Wiper Blade Replacement on page 375 and
Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 427 for
more information.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and
all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts.
If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, body door
and fuel door hinges, latches and locks (including
glove box and console doors), hood latch
assembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor,
release pawl, and any moving seat hardware.
Lubricate hood safety lever pivot and prop rod
pivot and tailgate latch bolt, handle assembly pivot
points, and hinges. More frequent lubrication
may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This
service can be complex; you should have
your dealer/retailer perform this service. See
Engine Coolant on page 345 for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate
a problem. Have the system inspected and
repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid
if needed.
(j) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police,
or delivery service.
(k) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt if
necessary.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be
performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability, and emission
control performance of your vehicle. Your
GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you with
these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed
at once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants
are added to your vehicle, make sure they are
the proper ones, as shown in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 452.
447
At Each Fuel Fill
At Least Once a Month
It is important to perform these underhood
checks at each fuel fill.
Tire Inflation Check
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper
oil if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 333 for
further details.
Notice: It is important to check the engine
oil regularly and keep it at the proper
level. Failure to keep the engine oil at
the proper level can cause damage to the
engine not covered by your warranty.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary.
See Engine Coolant on page 345 for
further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid reservoir and
add the proper fluid if necessary.
448
Inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not
forget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 384. Check to make sure
the spare tire is stored securely. See Changing
a Flat Tire on page 400.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage
highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life
System service notification. Check the tires for
wear and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See
Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 390.
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 133.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready
to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start
the engine in each gear. The vehicle should
start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedal down
halfway, and try to start the engine. The vehicle
should start only when the clutch pedal is
pushed down all the way to the floor. If the
vehicle starts when the clutch pedal is not
pushed all the way down, contact your dealer/
retailer for service.
449
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking
Brake on page 133.
Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
450
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON, but
do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/
retailer for service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set,
try to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever
position.
• With an automatic transmission, the ignition
should turn to LOCK only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P). The ignition key should
come out only in LOCK.
• With a manual transmission, the ignition key
should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your
vehicle could begin to move. You or
others could be injured and property
could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of your vehicle in case it
begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular
brake, set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to
PARK (P). Then release the parking brake
followed by the regular brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush
any corrosive materials from the underbody.
Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where
mud and other debris can collect.
451
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on page 333.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant Coolant.
See Engine Coolant
on page 345.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
System
Windshield
Washer
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
452
Usage
Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering GM
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Manual
Transmission
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,
in Canada 89021807).
Hydraulic
Clutch System
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345347,
in Canada 10953517) or equivalent
DOT-3 brake fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Front and
Rear Axle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,
in Canada 10953455) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Transfer Case
Synchromesh Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345349,
in Canada 10953465).
Rear Driveline
Center Spline
and Universal
Joints
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubricant
Constant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Velocity
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Universal Joint meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hood and
Door Hinges,
Body Door
Hinge Pins,
Liftgate Hinge
and Linkage,
Folding Seats,
and Fuel
Door Hinge
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points and
Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Synthetic Grease
with Teflon, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
453
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from
your GM dealer.
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part Number
15202408
A1624C
2.9L Engine
88984215
PF46
3.7L Engine
89017342
PF61
12598004
41-103
Driver’s Side — 22 inches (55 cm)
88958226
—
Passenger’s Side — 19 inches (48 cm)
88958228
—
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Windshield Wiper Blades
454
Engine Drive Belt Routing
2.9L and 3.7L Engines
455
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the
service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on
page 440. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 447 can be added on the
following record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
456
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
457
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
458
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ....... 460
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 460
Online Owner Center ................................. 463
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 464
Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 464
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 465
Roadside Assistance Program ................... 466
Courtesy Transportation ............................. 469
Collision Damage Repair ........................... 471
Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 475
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..................... 475
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ............................ 475
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors ...................................... 476
Service Publications Ordering
Information ............................................. 476
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ......... 478
Event Data Recorders ............................... 479
OnStar ...................................................... 480
Navigation System ..................................... 480
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ........ 480
459
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or
service departments. Sometimes, however,
despite the best intentions of all concerned,
misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has
not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following
steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter
has already been reviewed with the sales,
service, or parts manager, contact the owner of
the dealership or the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the U.S., contact the Chevrolet
Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact General
Motors of Canada Customer Communication
Centre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please
have the following information available to give
the Customer Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title,
or the plate at the top left of the instrument
panel and visible through the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s
facility. That is why we suggest you follow
Step One first if you have a concern.
460
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General
Motors and your dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied with your
new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain
unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined
in Steps 1 and 2, you should file with the
Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program
to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court
program administered by the Council of Better
Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes
regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation
of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you
may be required to resort to this informal dispute
resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case
will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do
not agree with the decision given in your case,
you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program
using the toll-free telephone number or write
them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and
the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited
by vehicle age, mileage, and other factors.
General Motors reserves the right to change
eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
461
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event
that you do not feel your concerns have been
addressed after following the procedure outlined in
Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware of its participation
in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.
General Motors of Canada Limited has committed
to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service claims. The program
provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program
is designed so that the entire dispute settlement
process, from the time you file your complaint
to the final decision, should be completed in about
70 days. We believe our impartial program
offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.
462
For further information concerning eligibility
in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.
Alternatively, you may call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you may
write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section
of gmcanada.com where you can save information
on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and
use handy tools and forms with greater ease.
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information
can be found in one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific
vehicle, including tips and videos and
an electronic version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history
and maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service
nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges
only available to members.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for
updated information and to register your vehicle.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services
you will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of
your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile,
subscribe to E-News and use tools and
forms with greater ease.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM
Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.
463
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of
hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text
Telephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance Center.
Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA
(243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Customer Assistance Offices
Canada — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the
toll-free number for assistance. However, if a
customer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
the letter should be addressed to:
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
www.Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
464
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors
Business Unit.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost
of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required
for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of
time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GM
Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility
Program. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
465
Roadside Assistance Program
In the U.S., call 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872).
•
In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days
a year.
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program.
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada,
a person driving this vehicle without the consent
of the owner is not eligible for coverage.
The following services are provided in the U.S.
during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,
in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverage
period of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up to a
maximum coverage of $100.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in Canada). Service to
466
•
•
•
provide diesel may be restricted. For safety
reasons, propane and other alternative fuels
will not be provided through this service.
Lock-out Service: To ensure security, the
driver must present personal identification
before lock-out service is provided. In Canada,
the vehicle registration is also required.
Lock-out service will be covered at no charge if
you are unable to gain entry into your vehicle.
A remote unlock may be available if you have
an active OnStar® subscription.
Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway
or Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership
for warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-out
assistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,
mud, or snow.
Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in
good condition, when equipped and properly
inflated, is covered at no charge. The customer
is responsible for the repair or replacement of
the tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.
Jump Start: No-start occurrences which
require a battery jump start will be covered at
no charge.
• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon
request, Roadside Assistance will send you
detailed, computer personalized maps,
highlighting your choice of either the most
direct route or the most scenic route to your
destination, anywhere in North America,
along with helpful travel information pertaining
to your trip.
We will make every attempt to send your
personalized trip routing as quickly as possible,
but it is best to allow three weeks before your
planned departure date. Trip routing requests
will be limited to six per calendar year.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance
(Canada only): In the event of a warranty
related vehicle disablement, while en route and
over 250 kilometres from original point of
departure, you may qualify for trip interruption
expense assistance. This assistance covers
reasonable reimbursement of up to a maximum
of $500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of
$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)
and (C) alternate ground transportation
(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assist
you with some of the unplanned expense
you may incur while waiting for your vehicle
to be repaired.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts and
a copy of the repair order are required.
Once authorization has been given, your
advisor will help you make any necessary
arrangements and explain how to claim for trip
interruption expense assistance.
• Alternative Service (Canada only): There
may be times, when Roadside Assistance
cannot provide timely assistance, your advisor
may authorize you to secure local emergency
road service, and you will be reimbursed up to
$100 upon submission of the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance.
In many instances, mechanical failures are
covered under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper
warranty, and the duration of the Base Warranty
Coverage for Canadian customers of the new
Vehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost for
parts and labor for non-warranty repairs are
the responsibility of the driver.
467
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside
Assistance Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number.
• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number.
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.
• Description of the problem.
While we hope you never have the occasion to
use our service, it is added security while traveling
for you and your family. Remember, we are
only a phone call away. U.S. customers call
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872), text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-888-889-2438, Canadian customers
call 1-800-268-6800.
468
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement
to an owner or driver when, in their sole
discretion, the claims become excessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in
the coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any
changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance
program at any time without notification.
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles
operated on a non-public roadway or highway,
fines, impound towing caused by a violation
of local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federal
law, and mounting, dismounting or changing
of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Courtesy Transportation
Scheduling Service Appointments
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer
Courtesy Transportation, a customer support
program for new vehicles.
When your vehicle requires warranty service,
contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and
advising your service consultant of your
transportation needs, your dealer can help
minimize your inconvenience.
For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper
(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period
(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, interim transportation may be available
under the Courtesy Transportation program.
Several courtesy transportation options are
available to assist in reducing your inconvenience
when warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty and is available only
at participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled
“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”
furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed
warranty coverage information.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the
service department immediately, keep driving it
until it can be scheduled for service, unless,
of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,
please call your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as
early in the work day as possible to allow for
the same day repair.
469
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed
while you wait. However, if you are unable to
wait, GM helps to minimize your inconvenience
by providing several transportation options.
Depending on the circumstances, your dealer
can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation and participating
dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get
you to your destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes one-way
or round trip shuttle service within reasonable time
and distance parameters for the dealer’s area.
Public Transportation or
Fuel Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
and public transportation is used as “shuttle
service”, the reimbursement is limited to
the associated shuttle allowance and must be
supported by original receipts. In addition,
470
for U.S. customers, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative, limited
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses
may be available. Claim amounts should reflect
actual costs and be supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with
a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for
a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle
is kept for an overnight warranty repair. Rental
reimbursement will be limited and must be
supported by original receipts. This requires that
you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible
for fuel usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Collision Parts
All program options, such as shuttle service,
may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy Transportation
arrangements will be administered by appropriate
dealer personnel.
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made
with the same materials and construction methods
as the parts with which your vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are
your best choice to assure that your vehicle’s
designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally
modify, change or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to resolve all
questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the
terms and conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it
is damaged, have the damage repaired by a
qualified technician using the proper equipment
and quality replacement parts. Poorly performed
collision repairs diminish your vehicle’s
resale value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be
used for repair. These parts are typically removed
from vehicles that were total losses in prior
accidents. In most cases, the parts being recycled
are from undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM part, may be
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s
originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts
is not known. Such parts are not covered by your
GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related
failures are not covered by that warranty.
471
Aftermarket collision parts are also available.
These are made by companies other than GM
and may not have been tested for your vehicle.
As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit
premature durability/corrosion problems, and may
not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts are not covered
by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision
repair facility that meets your needs before you
ever need collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer
may have a collision repair center with GM-trained
technicians and state of the art equipment, or
be able to recommend a collision repair center
that has GM-trained technicians and comparable
equipment.
472
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality
of coverage afforded by various insurance policy
terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced
protection to your GM vehicle by limiting
compensation for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company
may require you to have insurance that assures
repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine
Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your lease
carefully, as you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
If an Accident Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in an
accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure
that no one else in your vehicle, or the
other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.
Do not leave the scene of an accident until
all matters have been taken care of. Move
your vehicle only if its position puts you
in danger or you are instructed to move it
by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested
information to police and other parties involved
in the accident. Do not discuss your personal
condition, mental frame of mind, or anything
unrelated to the accident. This will help guard
against post-accident legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call
GM Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 466 for
more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know
where the towing service will be taking it.
Get a card from the tow truck operator or
write down the driver’s name, the service’s
name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle
before it is towed away. Make sure this
includes your insurance information and
registration if you keep these items in your
vehicle.
• Gather the important information you will
need from the other driver. Things like name,
address, phone number, driver’s license
number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,
model and model year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description
of the damage to the other vehicle.
473
• If possible, call your insurance company from
the scene of the accident. They will walk you
through the information they will need. If
they ask for a police report, phone or go to
the police department headquarters the
next day and you can get a copy of the report
for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not
be necessary. This is especially true if there
are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility
for your vehicle. Whether you select a
dealer/retailer or a private collision repair
facility to fix the damage, make sure you are
comfortable with them. Remember, you
will have to feel comfortable with their work
for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully
and make sure you understand what work
will be performed on your vehicle. If you have
a question, ask for an explanation. Reputable
shops welcome this opportunity.
474
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage
repairs, GM recommends that you take an active
role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined
repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there,
or have it towed there. Specify to the facility
that any required replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either new Genuine
GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered
by your GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy
limits, your insurance company may initially value
the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this
with your repair professional, and insist on
Genuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle
is leased you may be obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
Reporting Safety Defects
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If you live in Canada, and you believe that
your vehicle has a safety defect, you should
immediately notify Transport Canada, in addition
to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.
You may call them at 1-800-333-0510
or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
If another party’s insurance company is paying
for the repairs, you are not obligated to accept
a repair valuation based on that insurance
company’s collision policy repair limits, as you
have no contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control of the
repair and parts choices as long as cost stays
within reasonable limits.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
475
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
Service Publications Ordering
Information
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport
Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly
hope you will notify General Motors. Please
call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
Or, write:
Service Manuals
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
476
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle
suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit
repair service procedures, adjustments, and
specifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,
and transfer cases.
Service Bulletins
Owner Information
Service Bulletins give technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin
contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis
and service of your vehicle.
Owner publications are written specifically for
owners and intended to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle. The owner manual
includes the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In Canada, the service bulletin reference number
can be obtained by contacting your General Motors
dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483). This reference number is
needed to order the service bulletin from Helm, Inc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US +
Processing Fee
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,
and Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US +
Processing Fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US +
Processing Fee
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are
available for current and past model GM vehicles.
To request an order form, specify year and
model name of the vehicle.
477
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the
vehicle’s performance and how it is driven.
For example, your vehicle uses computer modules
to monitor and control engine and transmission
performance, to monitor the conditions for
airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a crash
and, if so equipped, to provide anti-lock braking
to help the driver control the vehicle. These
modules may store data to help your dealer/retailer
technician service your vehicle. Some modules
may also store data about how you operate
the vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption
or average speed. These modules may also retain
the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and
without incurring obligation. Allow ample time
for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices
are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable in U.S. funds.
478
Event Data Recorders
Some information about your vehicle’s performance
and how it is driven may be recorded on various
modules if a crash occurs. Some people refer to
these modules as event data recorders (EDRs).
These modules may record several seconds of
pre-crash and crash data, such as data related to
engine speed, brake application, throttle
position, vehicle speed, yaw rate, steering
wheel angle, lateral acceleration, safety belt
usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance
and the severity of the collision. Unlike the
flight data recorders on airplanes, these modules
do not record sounds or conversations.
To retrieve this data, special equipment and
access to the vehicle or the module that stores
the data are required. Certain data may also
be sent to or retrieved by OnStar® (see below).
GM will not access this information or share it
with others except: with the consent of the
vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response to an official
request of police or similar government office;
as part of GM’s defense of litigation through
the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also
be used for GM research needs or may be
made available to others for research purposes,
where a need is shown and the data is not tied
to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
Others may be able to retrieve this data if they
have access to the vehicle and have the special
equipment necessary to download the data.
479
OnStar
®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe
to the OnStar® services, please refer to the
OnStar® Terms and Conditions for information
on data collection and use. See also OnStar®
System on page 149 for more information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system,
use of the system may result in the storage of
destinations, addresses, telephone numbers,
and other trip information. Please refer to
the navigation system operating manual for
information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
480
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for
functions such as tire pressure monitoring
and ignition system security, as well as in
connection with conveniences such as key fobs
for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, and
in-vehicle transmitters for garage door openers.
RFID technology in GM vehicles does not
use or record personal information or link with any
other GM system containing personal information.
A
Accessories and Modifications ..................... 324
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 95
Additives, Fuel ............................................ 326
Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 432
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 338
Air Conditioning ........................................... 177
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 186
Readiness Light ....................................... 185
Airbag System ............................................... 77
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? ...................................... 86
When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 83
Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 80
Airbag Systems
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 95
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 85
Passenger Sensing System ....................... 88
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 94
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 85
AM-FM Radio .............................................. 209
Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 244
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System ....................................................
Anti-Lock Brake System ..............................
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .......
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........
Care of Safety Belts ................................
Chemical Paint Spotting ...........................
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ..............
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ..........
Fabric/Carpet ...........................................
Finish Care ..............................................
Finish Damage .........................................
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces ..........................
Leather ....................................................
Sheet Metal Damage ...............................
Tires ........................................................
Underbody Maintenance ...........................
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ..........
Washing Your Vehicle ..............................
Weatherstrips ...........................................
Windshield and Wiper Blades ...................
Ashtray .......................................................
Assist Handles ............................................
244
251
190
428
425
430
426
422
423
426
429
425
424
429
429
430
431
426
425
427
177
154
481
Audio System ..............................................
AM-FM Radio ..........................................
Care of Your CD Player ...........................
Care of Your CDs ....................................
Chime Level Adjustment ...........................
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................
Radio with CD .........................................
Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................
Setting the Time ......................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................
Understanding Radio Reception ...............
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......
Automatic Headlamp System .......................
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ........................................................
Operation .................................................
206
209
243
243
244
244
212
222
208
242
242
244
172
339
124
B
Battery ........................................................ 361
Electric Power Management ..................... 175
Run-Down Protection ............................... 175
482
Battery Warning Light ..................................
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ....................
Brake
Emergencies ............................................
Parking ....................................................
Brakes ........................................................
System Warning Light ..............................
Braking .......................................................
Braking in Emergencies ...............................
Break-In, New Vehicle .................................
Bulb Replacement .......................................
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL) ...............................
Front Turn Signal, Parking and
Daytime Running Lamps .......................
Halogen Bulbs .........................................
Headlamps ...............................................
License Plate Lamps ................................
Replacement Bulbs ..................................
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps ..............................
Buying New Tires ........................................
188
283
253
133
357
189
250
253
118
370
372
372
370
371
374
374
373
392
C
Calibration .......................................... 142, 145
California Fuel ............................................. 326
California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 324
Canadian Owners ........................................... 3
Capacities and Specifications ....................... 437
Carbon Monoxide .............. 110, 139, 286, 306
Care of
Safety Belts ............................................. 425
Your CD Player ........................................ 243
Your CDs ................................................. 243
CD, MP3 ..................................................... 234
Center Front Passenger Position,
Safety Belts ............................................... 36
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ..... 372
Chains, Tire ................................................. 398
Check
Engine Light ............................................ 192
Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 331
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 430
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................. 50
Infants and Young Children ........................ 46
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children .................................................. 56
Child Restraints (cont.)
Older Children ........................................... 44
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ................................. 69
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position ..................... 71
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position ........................ 72
Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 54
Chime Level Adjustment .............................. 244
Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 177
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 428
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 426
Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 423
Finish Care .............................................. 426
Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 422
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces .......................... 425
Leather .................................................... 424
Tires ........................................................ 429
Underbody Maintenance ........................... 430
Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 426
Weatherstrips ........................................... 425
Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 427
483
Climate Control System ............................... 177
Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 180
Clock .......................................................... 208
Clutch, Hydraulic ......................................... 344
Collision Damage Repair ............................. 471
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 40
Compass ............................................ 142, 145
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 115
Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 250
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 191
Heater, Engine ......................................... 123
Cooling System ........................................... 350
Cruise Control ............................................. 166
Cruise Control Light .................................... 196
Cupholder(s) ................................................ 153
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation ........................... 469
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 464
Customer Assistance Offices .................... 464
Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 460
484
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ......
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .....................................
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ..........................
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ....................
Roadside Assistance Program ..................
Service Publications Ordering
Information ...........................................
465
476
475
475
466
476
D
Daytime Running Lamps .............................
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light .......
Defensive Driving ........................................
Disc, MP3 ...................................................
Doing Your Own Service Work ....................
Dome Lamp ................................................
Dome Lamp Override ..................................
171
197
246
234
325
174
175
Door
Locks ....................................................... 106
Power Door Locks ................................... 107
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 108
Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 108
Rear Doors .............................................. 109
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ................................... 26
Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 198
DIC Controls and Displays ....................... 198
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 202
Driving
At Night ................................................... 276
City .......................................................... 281
Defensive ................................................. 246
Drunken ................................................... 247
Freeway ................................................... 282
Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 284
In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 278
Off-Road .................................................. 260
Recovery Hooks ....................................... 292
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 291
Winter ...................................................... 286
E
EDR ............................................................
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................
Engine Compartment Fuse Block .............
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...........................
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light .....
Coolant ....................................................
Coolant Heater .........................................
Coolant Temperature Gage ......................
Drive Belt Routing ....................................
Engine Compartment Overview ................
Exhaust ...................................................
Fan Noise ................................................
Oil ...........................................................
Oil Life System ........................................
Overheating .............................................
Running While Parked .............................
Starting ....................................................
478
432
433
433
433
338
192
345
123
191
455
332
139
355
333
336
348
140
121
485
Event Data Recorders ................................. 479
Exit Lighting ................................................ 175
Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 43
Exterior Cargo Lamps ................................. 174
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 170
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................
Finish Damage ............................................
Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................
Flashers, Hazard Warning ...........................
Flash-to-Pass ..............................................
Flat Tire ......................................................
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................
Flat Tire, Storing .........................................
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ............................
Manual Transmission ................................
Power Steering ........................................
Windshield Washer ..................................
486
338
429
244
162
165
399
400
416
339
342
355
356
Fog Lamp
Fog ..........................................................
Four-Wheel Drive ............................... 129,
Front Armrest Storage Area .........................
Front Axle ...................................................
Front Turn Signal, Parking and
Daytime Running Lamps ..........................
Fuel ............................................................
Additives ..................................................
California Fuel ..........................................
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..............
Filling Your Tank ......................................
Fuels in Foreign Countries .......................
Gage .......................................................
Gasoline Octane ......................................
Gasoline Specifications ............................
Fuses
Engine Compartment Fuse Block .............
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................
Windshield Wiper .....................................
173
368
154
369
372
326
326
326
330
328
327
197
326
326
433
433
433
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ....................
Fuel .........................................................
Speedometer ...........................................
Tachometer ..............................................
Gasoline
Octane .....................................................
Specifications ...........................................
Glove Box ...................................................
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ..........
191
197
183
183
326
326
153
465
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................ 162
Head Restraints ............................................ 15
Headlamps .................................................. 371
Bulb Replacement .................................... 370
Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 171
Exterior Lamps ......................................... 170
Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 165
Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 370
High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 165
On Reminder ........................................... 171
Heated Seats ................................................ 11
Heater ......................................................... 177
Highbeam On Light ..................................... 196
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 284
Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 284
Hood
Checking Things Under ............................ 331
Release ................................................... 331
Horn ............................................................ 162
How to Use This Manual ................................ 3
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 26
Hydraulic Clutch .......................................... 344
I
Ignition Positions ......................................... 119
Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 46
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 384
Instrument Panel
Overview .................................................. 160
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness ................................................ 174
Cluster ..................................................... 182
Interior Lamps ............................................. 174
487
J
Jump Starting .............................................. 362
K
Keyless Entry System ................................. 102
Keys ........................................................... 101
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 378
Lamps
Dome ....................................................... 174
Dome Lamp Override ............................... 175
Exterior Cargo .......................................... 174
LATCH System
Child Restraints ......................................... 56
Latches, Seatback ......................................... 16
License Plate Lamps ................................... 374
Light
Airbag Readiness ..................................... 185
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 190
Battery Warning ....................................... 188
488
Light (cont.)
Brake System Warning .............................
Cruise Control ..........................................
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator ............
Highbeam On ..........................................
Malfunction Indicator ................................
Oil Pressure .............................................
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder ..............
Safety Belt Reminder ...............................
Security ...................................................
Tire Pressure ...........................................
Up-Shift ...................................................
Lighting
Exit ..........................................................
Lights
Exterior Lamps .........................................
Flash-to-Pass ...........................................
High/Low Beam Changer .........................
Interior Lamps ..........................................
On Reminder ...........................................
Limited-Slip Rear Axle .................................
Loading Your Vehicle ...................................
Lockout Protection .......................................
189
196
197
196
192
195
186
184
184
196
191
189
175
170
165
165
174
171
254
293
109
Locks
Door ........................................................ 106
Lockout Protection ................................... 109
Power Door ............................................. 107
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 108
Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 108
Loss of Control ........................................... 259
Lumbar
Manual Controls ......................................... 10
Power Controls .......................................... 11
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ....................
At Each Fuel Fill ......................................
At Least Once a Month ............................
At Least Once a Year ..............................
Introduction ..............................................
Maintenance Footnotes ............................
Maintenance Record ................................
Maintenance Requirements ......................
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts ...............................
Owner Checks and Services ....................
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......
444
448
448
449
440
446
456
440
454
447
452
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 442
Using ....................................................... 440
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 440
Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 192
Manual Lumbar Controls ............................... 10
Manual Seats .................................................. 9
Manual Transmission
Fluid ........................................................ 342
Operation ................................................. 126
Manual Windows ......................................... 112
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 202
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with
Compass and Temperature Display ....... 145
Automatic Dimming Rearview
with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display ............................. 142
Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 141
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 142
Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 148
Outside Manual Mirrors ............................ 147
Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 148
MP3 ............................................................ 234
MyGMLink.com ............................................ 463
489
N
Navigation System, Privacy ......................... 480
New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 118
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts ................................... 454
O
Odometer .................................................... 183
Odometer, Trip ............................................ 183
Off-Road Driving .......................................... 260
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 257
Oil
Engine ..................................................... 333
Pressure Light .......................................... 195
Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 336
Older Children, Restraints ............................. 44
Online Owner Center ................................... 463
OnStar, Privacy ........................................... 480
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 149
Other Warning Devices ................................ 162
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 180
490
Outlets
Accessory Power ..................................... 176
Outside
Convex Mirror .......................................... 148
Manual Mirrors ......................................... 147
Power Mirrors .......................................... 148
Owner Checks and Services ....................... 447
Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3
P
Paint, Damage ............................................ 429
Park (P)
Shifting Into ............................................. 135
Shifting Out of ......................................... 137
Parking
Brake ....................................................... 133
Over Things That Burn ............................ 138
Parking Your Vehicle ................................... 137
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 186
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 88
Passing ....................................................... 257
Passlock® .................................................... 117
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab .............. 299
Power
Door Locks .............................................. 107
Lumbar Controls ........................................ 11
Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 121
Seat .......................................................... 10
Steering Fluid .......................................... 355
Windows .................................................. 113
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 43
Privacy ........................................................ 478
Event Data Recorders .............................. 479
Navigation System ................................... 480
OnStar ..................................................... 480
Radio Frequency Identification .................. 480
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 108
Q
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ............................................... 25
R
Radiator Pressure Cap ................................ 348
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID),
Privacy ..................................................... 480
Radios ........................................................ 206
AM-FM Radio .......................................... 209
Care of Your CD Player ........................... 243
Care of Your CDs .................................... 243
Radio with CD ......................................... 212
Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 222
Setting the Time ...................................... 208
Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 242
Understanding Reception ......................... 242
Rear Axle .................................................... 368
Limited-Slip .............................................. 254
Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 108
Rear Doors ................................................. 109
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 40
Rear Seat Operation .............................. 17, 18
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 37
Rear Storage Area ...................................... 154
491
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Compass and Temperature Display ............ 145
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming
with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display ................................ 142
Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................... 142
Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 141
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 12
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 452
Recovery Hooks .......................................... 292
Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 300
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 102
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,
Operation ................................................. 103
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire .......................................... 404
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 401
Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 374
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government ............................. 475
General Motors ........................................ 476
United States Government ....................... 475
492
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems ................. 96
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ......................................... 96
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 121
Right Front Passenger Position,
Safety Belts ............................................... 35
Roadside
Assistance Program ................................. 466
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 291
Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 455
Running the Engine While Parked ............... 140
S
Safety Belt
Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 184
Pretensioners ............................................. 43
Reminder Light ........................................ 184
Safety Belts
Care of .................................................... 425
Center Front Passenger Position ................ 36
Safety Belts (cont.)
Driver Position ........................................... 26
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 26
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ............................................ 25
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 40
Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 37
Right Front Passenger Position .................. 35
Safety Belt Extender .................................. 43
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 35
Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 20
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 34
Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4
Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 442
Seatback Latches .......................................... 16
Seats
Head Restraints ......................................... 15
Heated Seats ............................................. 11
Manual ........................................................ 9
Manual Lumbar .......................................... 10
Power Lumbar ........................................... 11
Power Seats .............................................. 10
Seats (cont.)
Rear Seat Operation ........................... 17, 18
Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 12
Seatback Latches ...................................... 16
Secondary Latch System ............................. 412
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Front Seat Position ......................... 71
Rear Seat Position ..................................... 69
Right Front Seat Position ........................... 72
Security Light .............................................. 196
Service ........................................................ 324
Accessories and Modifications .................. 324
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle ..................................... 325
California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 324
Doing Your Own Work ............................. 325
Engine Soon Light ................................... 192
Publications Ordering Information ............. 476
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 94
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 429
Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 135
Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 137
493
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 34
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 164
Sliding Rear Windows ................................. 114
Spare Tire ................................................... 420
Installing .................................................. 404
Removing ................................................ 401
Storing ..................................................... 416
Specifications, Capacities ............................ 437
Speedometer ............................................... 183
Starting Your Engine ................................... 121
Steering ...................................................... 255
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 162
Storage Areas
Cupholder(s) ............................................ 153
Front Armrest Storage Area ...................... 154
Glove Box ................................................ 153
Rear Storage Area ................................... 154
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 290
Sun Visors .................................................. 115
Sunroof ....................................................... 156
494
T
Tachometer .................................................
Tailgate .......................................................
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .....................................
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..............................
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................
Passlock® ................................................
Tilt Wheel ....................................................
Time, Setting ...............................................
Tire
Pressure Light ..........................................
Tires ...........................................................
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning ...............................................
Buying New Tires .....................................
Chains .....................................................
Changing a Flat Tire ................................
Cleaning ..................................................
183
110
373
242
115
115
117
162
208
191
377
428
392
398
400
429
Tires (cont.)
Different Size ...........................................
If a Tire Goes Flat ...................................
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................
Inspection and Rotation ............................
Installing the Spare Tire ...........................
Pressure Monitor System .........................
Removing the Flat Tire .............................
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .........
Secondary Latch System .........................
Spare Tire ................................................
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools .....
Tire Sidewall Labeling ..............................
Tire Terminology and Definitions ...............
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ...........
Wheel Replacement .................................
When It Is Time for New Tires .................
Towing
Recreational Vehicle .................................
Towing a Trailer .......................................
Your Vehicle .............................................
394
399
384
390
404
385
404
401
412
420
416
378
381
395
396
396
391
300
306
299
Traction
Control System (TCS) ..............................
Limited-Slip Rear Axle ..............................
Trailer
Recommendations ....................................
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic .......................................
Fluid, Manual ...........................................
Up-Shift Light ...........................................
Transmission Operation, Automatic ..............
Transmission Operation, Manual ..................
Trip Odometer .............................................
Truck-Camper Loading Information ..............
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ...................
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ....................
253
254
320
339
342
189
124
126
183
299
164
163
U
Understanding Radio Reception ................... 242
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 395
Up-Shift Light .............................................. 189
495
V
Vehicle
Control ..................................................... 250
Damage Warnings ....................................... 5
Loading .................................................... 293
Parking Your ............................................ 137
Symbols ...................................................... 5
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ............ 478
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) .......................................... 432
Service Parts Identification Label .............. 432
Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 180
Visors .......................................................... 115
W
Warning Lights,
Gages and Indicators ............................... 181
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 202
Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 162
Other Warning Devices ............................ 162
Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4
Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5
496
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance ..................... 396
Different Size ........................................... 394
Replacement ............................................ 396
Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 54
Windows ..................................................... 112
Manual ..................................................... 112
Power ...................................................... 113
Sliding Rear ............................................. 114
Windshield
Washer .................................................... 166
Washer Fluid ........................................... 356
Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 375
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 427
Wiper Fuses ............................................ 433
Wipers ..................................................... 165
Winter Driving ............................................. 286
X
XM Radio Messages ................................... 240
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 244
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............... 440
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement